SR-600 Um 373GB GB WW 1123-1 PDF

373GB
Fixed Mount 2D Code

Reader
SR-600 Series
User's Manual
Read this manual before use.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Introduction
This instruction manual describes the connection/wiring procedure, setting instructions, and precautions for using
the SR-600 Series 2D Code Reader. Before using the SR-600 Series, it is important to read this manual carefully to
ensure optimum performance. Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference.
General cautions
Take necessary safety measures to avoid any damage in the unlikely event of a problem.
Do not modify the SR-600 Series, or use it in any way other than as described in the specifications.
When the SR-600 Series is used in combination with other devices, functions and performance may be
degraded, depending on the operating conditions and surrounding environment.
Parts of this manual may not be used or duplicated without expressed permission.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
Safety Precautions
For Safe Use of Laser Products
The SR-600 Series 2D Code Reader uses a visible semiconductor laser, with a wavelength of 660 nm, as a target
pointer for adjusting the reading position. The laser is classified as a Class 1 laser under IEC standards
(IEC 60825-1: Radiation safety standards for laser products).
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Laser pointer
Wavelength
WARNING
660 nm
Output
90 W
Pulse width
200 s
Laser class
Class 1 laser product

IEC 60825-1
Do not look directly at the laser beam. Doing so may damage your eyes. Do not intentionally
direct the laser beam at people.
Do not disassemble the product. Doing so may damage your eyes due to laser beam
exposure.
Be sure to stop the laser emission before cleaning the scanner. Otherwise, exposure to the
laser may cause eye injury.
373GB
Note
Do not use a voltage other than 5VDC with the SR-600 Series. Doing so may cause damage to the
unit. When the SR-600 reader head is connected to a dedicated communication unit (N-R2, N-R4, NUB, N-L1, NX-50 Series or DV-90 Series), be sure to supply power according to the respective
communication unit's specifications.
Be sure to turn off the power to devices attached to the SR-600 Series when you plug in or unplug the
cables. Failure to do so may cause damage to the SR-600 Series.
Do not disassemble or modify the SR-600 Series. Doing so may cause damage to the unit.
Keep the cables away from high-tension cables or power sources. Otherwise, noise could cause
malfunctions or accidents.
The SR-600 Series is a precision instrument. Do not impact or
drop the instrument. Be especially careful when transporting or
installing the unit.
Do not hold the SR-600 Series by its cable. The units may be
damaged if they strike each other.
Do not allow water, oil, dust, or other foreign substances to stick to the scanner. This may cause read
errors. Use a soft, dry cloth to wipe any substance from the scanner. (Do not use a cloth dipped in
alcohol or other cleaning substance.)
Safety Precautions for International

Regulations
Installing the SR-600 Series
UL certification
The SR-600 Series is a UL/C-UL Listed/Recognized product.
File No.: E207185, Category: NRAQ/NRAQ7, Applicable standards: UL508
File No.: E167973, Category: NWGQ2/NWGQ8, Applicable standards: UL60950-1
Be sure to comply with the specifications below:
Use a power supply that provides Class 2 output defined in NEPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code).
Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category I
FDA (CDRH) Regulations

The SR-600 Series complies with the following FDA (CDRH) regulations.
Applicable regulations: 21 CFR Part 1040.10, Class 1 Laser Product
The classification is based on IEC60825-1 according to Laser Notice No. 50 issued by the FDA (CDRH).
CE Marking
The SR-600 Series complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directives and Low-voltage Directives. The
following EN standards apply:
Applicable standards (EMI)
EN55011, Class A
EN55022, Class A
Applicable standards (EMS)
EN61000-6-2
EN61000-6-1
Applicable standards (LVD)
EN60825-1, Class 1 Laser Product
* Conformity was confirmed through evaluation of the SR-600 Series combined with the dedicated communication
units (N-R2/R4/UB/L1).
FCC Regulations
The SR-600 Series complies with the following FCC EMI regulations:
Applicable regulations: FCC 47 CFR Part 15, Subpart B, Class A, Digital devices
Canada IC (Industry Canada) Regulations

The SR-600 Series complies with the following IC EMI regulations:
Applicable regulations: ICES-003, Class A digital apparatus
Dedicated Communication Unit N-R2/R4/UB/L1

UL certification
SR-600 Series:
The communication units N-R2/R4/UB/L1, have obtained the following UL/C-UL certifications:
Be sure to observe the following installation and environment conditions:
Pollution degree 2
CAUTION
Do not connect directly to the branch circuit. This product must be supplied power by a suitable,
approved isolated transformer or power supply not exceeding 200 VA max.
FCC Regulations
The communication units N-R2/R4/UB/L1 comply with the following FCC EMI regulations:
FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B digital devices

The communication units N-R2/R4/UB/L1 comply with the following IC EMI regulations:
ICES-003, Class B digital apparatus
CE Marking
The communication units N-R2/R4/UB/L1 comply with essential requirements of the EMC Directives. The following
EN standards are applied:
EN55011, Class A
EN55022, Class B (N-L1: Class A)
EN61000-6-2
EN61000-6-1
* The length of the communication and power cables should be less than 30 m.
* For the N-UB, install a ferrite core on the USB cable as shown below.
Recommended types:
Model: ZCAT2035-0930 (TDK)
OP-31973 (Keyence)
Software License Agreement

The KEYENCE Corporation (hereinafter referred to as "KEYENCE") requires that you accept the terms and
conditions of the following software license agreement (hereinafter referred to as the "Agreement") before using the
"SR-H60W" Configuration Software for the SR-600 Series (hereinafter referred to as the "Software").
By using or reproducing any part of the Software, you signify that you accept all the terms and conditions of this
Agreement and the Agreement shall be concluded.
Item 1: License
1 KEYENCE shall give its assent to the non-exclusive license of the Software to you provided that you abide
by this Agreement.
2 You can install the Software in order to use the KEYENCE product which you purchased, regardless of the
number of licenses, as long as the Software is used for only one corporation.
Item 2: Limited reproduction
You can reproduce the Software only once for the purpose of keeping the backup copy of the Software for
yourself.
Item 3: Prohibitions
You are prohibited to do the following to the Software:
a. Alterations such as changing or adding a function of the Software partially or entirely.
The actions which are explicitly approved by KEYENCE, such as installing the update programs or
additional functions provided by KEYENCE shall be excluded.
b. Any kinds of reverse engineering to analyze the Software, including reverse compilation and reverse
assembly.
c. Selling, transferring, redistributing, licensing, renting or leasing the Software to a third party.
Except where you have prior consent from KEYENCE.
Item 4: Copyright
The copyrights of the Software and its instruction manual and other related items are retained by KEYENCE.
Item 5: Disclaimer
KEYENCE shall have no liability for any losses or damages to you or to any third parties that have resulted from
the operation of the Software.
Item 6: Support
Based on the Agreement, KEYENCE provides technical support, such as answering questions about the
Software. There is, however, no guarantee that your purpose will be achieved by the provided technical
support.
Item 7: Termination of contract
1 This Agreement shall be terminated automatically when you stop the use of this Software by discarding the
Software and its copy.
2 If you violate any part of the terms of this Agreement, KEYENCE can unilaterally cancel your Agreement. In
such a case, you should immediately return the Software and its copy to KEYENCE or discard them.
3 If your violation of the Agreement causes losses or damages upon KEYENCE, you will pay indemnity for the
losses or damages caused.
Item 8: Applicable laws
This Agreement shall be carried out under Japanese laws and regulations.
End of the Agreement
Table of Contents
Introduction
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
For Safe Use of Laser Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety Precautions for International Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Installing the SR-600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Dedicated Communication Unit N-R2/R4/UB/L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Chapter 1 Overview
1-1
Package Contents and Product Lineup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2
Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Installing the SR-600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Dedicated Communication Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Field Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-3
System Configuration and Setup Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Setup Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Chapter 2 Connection and Wiring

2-1
Connecting the SR-600 Series to the Dedicated Communication Unit. . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2-2
Connecting the SR-600 Series to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2-3
Wiring the Dedicated Communication Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Installing the USB Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Connecting the DC Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
I/O Terminal Layout and Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Wiring an RS-232C Port Device (N-R2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Wiring to an RS-422A/485 Port Device (N-R4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Wiring a USB Port Device (N-UB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Wiring a LAN Port Device (N-L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
2-4
Connecting the Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Connecting the SR-600 Series to the NX-50CL Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
I/O Terminal Layout and Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Wiring a Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Connecting to a PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
2-5
Connection when not using a Communication Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

Pin Layout and Connection of SR-600 Series Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Chapter 3 SR-600 Series Functions

3-1
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

TUNE Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
TEST Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
External Input Operation and Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3-2
Quick Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

Quick Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Running Quick Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Setting the Quick Calibration Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
3-3
Alternate Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

Alternate Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Alternate Function Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
3-4
Preset/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
3-5
Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Preset/Verification Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

SR-600 Series Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Test Mode Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Test Mode Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-6
Multi-I/O Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Function and Operation of the Input Terminals (IN1 and IN2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Function and Operation of the Output Terminals (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4) . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-7
Quick Setup Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
3-8
Preventive Maintenance Information (PMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
3-9
Image Saving Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Quick Setup Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Image Saving Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Chapter 4 Operation of the SR-600 Series

4-1
Reading Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Reading Operation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Alternate Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Trigger Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Data Transmission Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
When Connected via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
4-2
Reading Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10

Single Reading Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Continuous Reading Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Bank Collection Reading Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Burst Reading Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Chapter 5 AutoID Navigator Functions and Operation

5-1
Installing, Starting, and Shutting Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

PC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Connection Update between AutoID Navigator and the SR-600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Shutdown Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Display of the icon during connection updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
5-2
Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6

Project Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Device Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
5-3
Using AutoID Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
5-4
Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Installation Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
5-5
Sending/Receiving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Sending Settings to the SR-600 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Receiving Settings from the SR-600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
5-6
Saving/Reading a Setting File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Saving a Setting File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Reading Setting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
5-7
Quick Setup Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Printing Quick Setup Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Reading the Quick Setup Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
5-8
Terminal and Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Using the Terminal Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Using Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
5-9
Live View and Load Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

Live View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Image Retrieval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48
Chapter 6 Mounting the SR-600 Series

6-1
Mounting the SR-600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Before Mounting the SR-600 Series: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Mounting the SR-600 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Adjusting the Installation Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Adjusting the Reading and Installation Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
6-2
Installing the Dedicated Communication Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6

Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Installing the Dedicated Communication Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
6-3
Installing the NX-50CL Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Installing the Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Chapter 7 Serial Communication

7-1
Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Serial Communication Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Serial Communication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2
Data Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Communication Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Send Buffer Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Read Data Communication Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Reading Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Appending Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Details of Appended Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-3
Command Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Types of Command Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Command Communication Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Command Communication Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Direct Control Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Chapter 8 Field Network Communication

8-1
CC-Link Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

Operating on a System that Uses CC-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
NX-50CL Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
CC-Link Memory and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Setting and Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
8-2
SR-600 Series Device Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

SR Series Device Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Chapter 9 Ethernet Communication

9-1
Overview of the N-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Basic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
9-2
Setting the N-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3

Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
N-L1 Registered List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Ethernet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
RS-232C Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Setting the N-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Setting Command List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9-3
Troubleshooting the N-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Appendix
1
SR-600 Series Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2
Reading Range Characteristics (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3
N-R2/R4/UB/L1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
NX-50CL Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
SR-600 Series Field of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Checksum Calculation Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
ASCII Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Configuration Record List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
10
Factory Default Setting List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
11
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
10
Overview
This chapter describes the package contents as well as the basic system
configuration and settings.
1-1
1-2
1-3
SR-600-M-NO1-E
Package Contents and Product Lineup . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
System Configuration and Setup Flow . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-1
1-1 Package Contents and Product Lineup

1
The packages of the SR-600 Series, dedicated communication unit, and AutoID system integration/configuration
software contain the following components. Be sure to check that you have all the listed contents before use.
Overview
SR-600 Series (2D code reader)

Insulating spacer (x 2)
Main unit (SR-600/610/600HA)
Washer (x 2)
Installation screws (M3) (x 2)
Mounting bracket (x 1)
Instruction Manual
96M11490
Operating Precautions
Do not use a voltage other than 5VDC with the SR-600
Series. Doing so may lead to damage on the unit.
When using the dedicated communication units (NX-50
Series, N-R2/R4/UB/L1, or DV-90 Series), use a power
supply within the appropriate range for each unit.
Be sure to turn the power off to devices attached to the
SR-600 series when you plug or unplug the cables.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the SR-600 Series.
Do not disassemble or modify the SR-600 Series. Doing
so may lead to damage on the unit.
Keep the cables away from high-tension cables or power
sources. Otherwise, noise could cause malfunctions or
accidents.
The SR-600 Series is a
precision instrument. Do
not apply shock to the
instrument or drop it. Be
especially careful when
transporting or installing
the unit.
2D Code Reader (Fixed Type)
SR-600 Series
Instruction Manual
Read this manual before use.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
DANGER
Failure to follow instructions may lead to death or serious injury.
WARNING
Failure to follow instructions may lead to injury.
CAUTION
Failure to follow instructions may lead to product damage or

malfunctions.
CAUTION
Do not hold the SR-600
Series by its cable. The
units may become
damaged if they strike
each other.
Provides additional information on proper operations that can be

easily mistaken.
Note
Provides advanced and useful information for operation.
Reference
Safety Information for SR-600 Series

General cautions
Take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the unlikely event of a
problem occurring.
Do not allow water, oil, dust, or other foreign substances

to stick to the scanner. This may cause read errors. Use a
soft, dry cloth to wipe any substances from the scanner.
(Do not use a cloth dipped in alcohol or other cleaning
substance.)
KEYENCE cannot guarantee the functionality or performance of units that have been
modified or used with specifications other than those described in this manual.
When the SR-600 Series is used in combination with other devices, functions and
performance may be degraded, depending on the operating conditions and
surrounding environment.
Parts of this manual may not be used or duplicated without express permission.
The contents of his manual are subject to change without notice.
This product is just intended to detect the object(s). Do not use this product for the
Regulations and Standards
purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body.
This product is not intended for use as explosion-proof product. Do not use this
UL Certifications
product in hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
The SR-600 Series is an UL/C-UL Listed/Recognized product.

File No.: E207185, Category: NRAQ/NRAQ7, Applicable standard: UL508
File No.: E167973, Category: NWGQ2/NWGQ8, Applicable standard: UL60950-1
Be sure to follow the specification below.
Use a power supply that provides Class 2 output defined in NEPA70
(NEC: National Electrical Code).
Pollution degree: 2
Overvoltage category: I
Safety precautions for laser product

The SR-600 Series uses a visible semiconductor laser, with wavelength of 660 nm, as a
target pointer for adjusting the reading position.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
FDA (CDRH) Regulations

The SR-600 Series complies with the following FDA (CDRH) regulations.
Laser pointer
Wavelength
Output
Applicable regulations: 21 CFR Part 1040.10, Class 1 Laser Product
660 nm
The classification is based on IEC60825-1 according to the Laser Notice No. 50 issued
by FDA (CDRH).
90 W
Pulse width
200 s
Laser class
Class 1 laser product

IEC60825-1
WARNING
CE Marking
The SR-600 Series complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive and Lowvoltage Directive.
The following harmonized standards are applied.
Applicable standards (EMI):
EN55011, Class A
EN55022, Class A
(EMS):
EN61000-6-2
EN61000-6-1
(LVD):
EN60825-1, Class 1 Laser Product
Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual. Otherwise,

injury to the human body (eyes and skin) may result.
Precautions on class 1 laser products
Do not stare into the beam.
Do not disassemble this product. Laser emission from
this product is not automatically stopped when it is
disassembled.
* We conducted the test on the combination with the SR-600 series and the
communication units (N-R2/UB/R4/L1) to confirm the conformity.
FCC Regulations
The SR-600 Series complies with the following FCC EMI regulations.
FCC 47 CFR Part 15, Subpart B, Class A, Digital devices

The SR-600 Series complies with the following IC EMI regulations.
ICES-003, Class A, Digital apparatus
1-2
E SR-600-IM
SR-600-M-NO1-E
Dedicated Communication Unit N-R2/R4/UB/L1

N-R2
N-R4
Overview
RS-422A/485 connector
RS-422A terminal seal
N-UB
N-L1
Instruction manual
(supplied for each unit)
96M00269
CAUTION
Dedicated Communication Unit

RS-422A/485 Output Type
N-R4
Locate the cables as far as possible from high-voltage

lines and power lines. Otherwise, generated noise may
cause product failure or malfunctions.
The N-R4 is a precision instrument. If the unit is
dropped or shock is applied, it may be damaged. Use
caution when unpacking, carrying, and mounting.
Be sure to observe all warnings, cautions, and
precautions specified in the manual.
Do not install the N-R4 in the following locations:

Locations subject to direct sunlight
Locations where the surrounding air temperature is outside the
range of 0 to +50C or locations subject to condensation as the

result of severe changes in temperature
Instruction Manual
Locations where the ambient humidity is outside the range of 35
to 85%RH.
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
Locations subject to dust, salts, iron dust, or oil smoke
Locations subject to shock or vibration
Locations subject to exposure of water, oil, or chemicals
Locations where strong magnetic or electric fields are generated
Foreign Regulations and Standards

DANGER
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to death or

serious injury.
UL certification
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to injury.
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to product

damage (product malfunction, etc.).
Applicable standards
UL File No.
UL category
CAUTION
The N-R4 complies with the following UL/CSA standards and has
obtained the UL/C-UL certification.
Note
TIPS
UL508, UL60950-1
E207185, E167973
NRAQ/NRAQ7, NWGQ2/NWGQ8
Be sure to observe the following installation and environment conditions.
Provides additional information on proper operation.
Pollution degree 2
Indicates useful information or information that aids

understanding of text descriptions.
Caution - Do not connect directly to the branch circuit. This product must
be supplied power by a suitable, approved isolated transformer or power
supply not exceeding 200 VA max.
FCC regulations
The N-R4 complies with the following FCC EMI regulations.
For Safely Using the Product
FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B digital device
General precautions
Canada IC (Industry Canada) regulations
At startup and during operation, be sure to check that the
The N-R4 complies with the following IC EMI regulations.
functions and performance of the N-R4 is operating properly.
ICES-003, Class B digital apparatus
We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to
CE marking
avoid any damage in the event a problem occurs.
The N-R4 complies with the following essential requirements of the EU

Directive.
If the N-R4 is modified or used in any way other than described in
the specifications, its function and performance cannot be

guaranteed.
When the N-R4 is used in combination with other instruments, the
function and performance may be effected by operating conditions
and the surrounding environment.
Do not use the N-R4 for the purpose of protecting the human
body.
The information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice.
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
The following harmonized standards are applied to this product in order

to confirm the compliance.
EN55011, Class A
EN55022, Class B
EN61000-6-2
EN61000-6-1
Notice
When this product is used under the circumstances and operating
environments described below, adhere to the limitations of the ratings,
take adequate measures to ensure safety such as fail-safe installations
and consult a KEYENCE sales representative.
Package Contents List

Main unit
Instruction manual
For use under circumstances or environments which are not
96M00275
CAUTION

described in the manual
N-R4


Locations where the ambient temperature is outside the range of
0 to +50C or locations subject to condensation as the result of

severe changes in temperature
Instruction Manual
to 85%RH.
For use with nuclear power control, railway, aircraft, vehicles,
incinerators, medical equipment, entertainment equipment, safety

devices etc.
DANGER

serious injury.
WARNING
CAUTION
UL approval
The N-R4 conforms to the following UL/CSA standards and has obtained
the UL/C-UL approval.
Conforming standards
UL File No.
UL category

Note
TIPS

FCC regulations
Conforming regulations
EMC directive (2004/108/EC)
By checking the conformity to the following EN standards, the conformity

to the essential requirements of the EMC directive is checked and the CE
marking is indicated.
functions and performance may be degraded, depending on the

operating conditions and the surrounding environment.
Conforming standards (EMI)

Conforming standards (EMS)
body.
Notice

Main unit
Instruction manual
Connector for the RS-422A/485
Seal for the connectors

(used when wiring RS-422A)
96M00275
CAUTION

N-R4
N-R4
N-UB



severe changes in temperature
Instruction Manual
to 85%RH.
Locations where strong magnetic or elec tric fields are generated

DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION

devices etc.
Note
TIPS

serious injury.
UL approval
The N-R4 conforms to the following UL/CSA standards and has obtained
the UL/C-UL approval.
Conforming standards
UL File No.
UL category

UL508, UL60950-1
E207185, E167973
When using the N-R4 as a UL approved product, be sure to observe the

following installation and environment conditions.
Pollution degree 2
FCC regulations

The N-R4 conforms to the following FCC EMI regulations.

ICES-003, Class B Digital equipment
CE marking
The N-R4 conforms to the following essential requirements of the EU
directive.
specifications or if modified, its functions and performance cannot

be guaranteed.
By checking the conformity to the following EN standards, the conformity

to the essential requirements of the EMC directive is checked and the CE
When the N-R4 is used in combination with other instruments,

body.
EN55011, Class A
EN55022, Class B
EN61000-6-2
EN61000-6-1
without notice.
Notice
is possible and extensive safety precautions are required
FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B

digital equipment
Canada IC (Industry Canada regulations)

The N-R4 conforms to the following IC EMI regulations.
General precautions
If the N-R4 is used in any way other than described in the
For use for applications where death or serious property damage
When the product is used under the circumstances or environment

below, adhere to the limitations of the ratings and functions, take
countermeasures for safety precautions such as fail-safe installations
Main unit
Instruction manual
Seal for the connectors

96M00266
Locate the cables as far as possible from

gh-volta
hi ge
lines and power lines. Otherwise,
generated noise may
CAUTION
dropped or shock is applied, it may beged.
dama
Use
caution when unpackin
g, carryin
g, and mountin
g.
Be sure to observe all warnin
gs, cautions, and

RS-232C Output Type
N-R2
Do not install theN-R2 in the follo

wing locations:
severe changes in temperatu re
to 85%RH.
Instruction Manual


DANGER
serious injury.
Foreign Re gulations and Standards

UL approval

WARNING
The N-R2 conforms to the follo

wing UL/CSA standards and hasbtained
o
the UL/C-UL appro
val.
Conforming standards UL508, UL60950-1
UL File No.
E2071 85, E167973
UL category

CAUTION

devices etc.
Note
TIPS
Indicatesuseful information or information that aids

Whenusing theN-R2 as a UL appro

ved product, be sure to observe the
following installation and en
vironment conditions.
Pollution degree 2
FCC re gulations
wing FCC EMI reg
ulations.
digital equipment
For Safely Usin g the Product

General precautions
Canada IC (Industry Canada re gulations)
At startup and during operation,be sure to check that the

functions and performance of theN-L1 is operating properly.
If the N-L1 is used in any way other than descri bed in the
specifications or if modified, its functions and performance can not
be guaranteed.
When the N-L1 is used in combination with other instruments,
Do not use the N-L1 for the purpose of protecting the uman
h
body.
without notice.

wing IC EMI regulations.
CE markin g
wing essential requirements of the EU
directive.
By checking the conformity to the follo
wing EN standards, the conformity
to the essential re
quirements of the EMC directi
ve is checked and the CE
EN55011, Class A
EN55022, Class B
EN61000-6-2
EN61000-6-1
Notice
When the product isused under the circumstances or environment

below, adhere to the limitations of the ratings and
unctions,
f
take
countermeasures for safety preca
utions such as fail-safe installations
and consult a KEYENCE sales representati
ve.
devices etc.
* The length of the comm

unication and po
wer cables should be less than 30 m.
Packa ge Contents List

Mainunit
For properly usin g the product
For properly using the product
Do not use the N-L1 in anenvironment subject to

flammable, explosive, or corrosive
gases.
Be sure that all screws are
ghtened
ti
securely.
Use crimp contacts of the specified size for
g. wirin
The N-L1 uses a 24 VDC power supply.
ga
Usin
power
CAUTION
supply outside this ran
ge or an AC power supply may
cause product failure.
Do not disassemble or modify the N-L1. This may cause
product failure.
Instruction man
ual
96M00266
Locate
g
hproduct
g
e-volta
thepower
cables
far
as
possible from hi
lines
nes.
g
eand
nerated
Otherwise,
li asmay
cause
failure
orinstrument.
malfunctions.
The
N-R2
is
a noise
precision
unit is
CAUTION
dropped
g
ed.
or
Use
shock
isall
applied,
it may If
bethe
dama
Dedicated
Unit
caution
g
,g
carryin
,,and
g
. when
mountin
unpackin
RS-232C
utp
utunication
TypeOComm
Be
sg
cautions,
to
observe
and
warnin
precautions
in
the manual.
Do
N
-R2
not
isure
ng
in
install
locations:
the
follo
the
N-R2
ub
ject
u
nw
light
to
direct
sspecified
Locations
w
h
ere
iject
b
ent
e
u
the
tside
temperat
is
am
o the
range of as the res
0
tveo
+50
C
or
u
lt sof
condensation
stemperat
InstructionLocations
Manual
se
re
u
rchanges
eurlocations
in range
h
ere
iub
b
ent
m
u
utidity
the
side
hto
isthe
o
of 35
to
85%
Rw
H.
Locations
ub
ject
evt,
or
et,
gases
corrosi
flamma
sam
usuvre
sblto
salts,
d
or
oil
iron
smoke
d
Locations
ibw
ration
shock
orchemicals
ub
au
to
ter,
of
expos
soil,
or
Locations
w
hject
ere
strong
magnetic
or electric fields are generated
DANGER
Failure to
follow
these
lead to death or
serious
injury.
Forei
g
ng
uRe
lations
andinstructions
Standards may
UL
WARNING
Failure to
toConforming
follow
these
instructions
may
lead
to product
injury.
The
N
-follow
R2
w
ing
conforms
UL/CSA
btained
to
standards
the follo and
has
o to
the
va.malfunction,
UL/C-UL
l.approval
appro
Failure
these
instructions
may
lead
,5,
UL60950-1
standards
CAUTION
dama
g
e (product
etc.). UL50
N
oN
File
E2071
E167973
UL
category
RAQ/
N
R
GQ2/
AQ7,
NW
GQ
Provides
additional
information
on proper operation.
Note
W
hen
uvtsng
-ltage
R2
v8
ed
the
ucNW
as
be
u
t,re
prod
b
s8
sveaer
tothe
UL
o2conditions.
appro
follo
w
iveu
vof
iN
installation
ronment
and
en aids
Indicates
u
su
l ef
information
or
information
Poll
ion
degree
TIPS
O
og
ring
category
I that
n
u
derstanding
text
descriptions.
Usin
FCC
ulations
re
For
gthe
Safely
Product
The
N
-R2
w
ing
conforms
upart
lations.
FCC
EMI
to
the
reg15
Conforming
ulations
FCC
B,
reg
Class
Part
Bfollo
S
digital
qu
ipment
e
General
precautions
Canada
g
uub
lations)
IC
(Industry
Canada
re e
At
urstart
and
ing
be
resoperation,
du
to
check
that
the
The
N
-to
R2
w
ing
conforms
lations.
IC
EMI
to
reg
the Class
follo
nupid
ctions
N
-u
operating
performance
properly.
of
the
Conforming
ulations
qu
ipment
ICES-003,
B Digital
W
e
recommend
uw
ub
stantial
rdamage
es
sispro
safety
that
yo
meas
vfu
a
o
any
vetake
nt
blL1
em
rother
u
aand
occ
the
ereg
If
the
u
sg
ay
in
b
es.
dany
in
than
the
descri
CE
markin
specifications
uis
n
and
ifin
performance
modified,
cannot
fthe
The
N
R2
w
ing
conforms
qu
irements
essential
toofits
the
re
the
follo
EU
bn
e
uN
a-N
ranteed.
directi
v-eperformance
.gor
W
h
en
-L1
L1
used
ed
ithe
b
nation
is
w
ictions
th
in
u
m
other
com
ents,
instr
EMC
ve
8/(2004/10
EC)
directi
fu
ctions
b
e
and
depending
may
on
operating
u
n
ro
ding
videgraded,
ronment.
conditions
en
the
sthis
By
checking
w
ing
N
standards,
Eand
the
conformity
follo
Do
N
e
-L1
not
u
the
rinformation
pose
for
u
m
body.
the
an
protecting
p
the
hconformity
to
qu
the
irements
essential
ve
is
checked
of
the
re
EMC
directi
theto
CE
The
ual
ub
ject
is
sof
to
change
contained
in
man
marking
is
indicated.
Conforming
5
5011,
standards
Class
A
(EMI)
Ethe
w
iu
tho
tusnotice.
E
N
55022,
Band
Conforming
1000-6-2
standards
(EMS)and
E f
Notice
E
N
61000-6-1
W
hu
en
ces
ustuned
the
is
der
um
viprod
ronment
the
circ
or
*The
npreca
ication
w
length
e6
b
les
ru
len
be
dca
less
sho
and
of
than
the
comm
30ratings
m.
b
e
w
,ulo
adhere
u.nstances
ctions,
to
the
take
limitations
ofpothe
co
n
ru
utlKEYE
ions
cve
h
as
safety
sman
fail-safe
installations
Packa
g
eitorurail
Contents
List
and
ltermeas
N
C
a
cons
E
sales
For
sbe
nu
u
eth
der
u
m
vu
ifor
ronments
circ
w
hqu
are
not
enucInstr
descri
ua
in
the
Main
u
nrepresentati
tion
ual e man
For
su
w
ite
ud
clear
w
e
nstances
retc.
w
acontrol,
y,
vpo
eich
hicles,
aircraft,
incinerators,
qu
ipment,
ipment,
entertainment
medical
safety
e
de
viu
For
usces
w
h
for
ere
usapplications
property
death
or
damage
serio
is
blepossi
ve
and
safety
utions
qu
ired
extensi
are
preca
re
For
properly
product
usin
Dg
othe
not
use
the
N-L1
inor
an
environment
subject to
flammable,
atened
g
ses.
explosive,
corrosive
supply
B
e
hN-L1
g
that
securely.
allpower
screws
are
timay
U
se
crimp
.product
contacts
ofsupply
the
specified
size for wiri n
CAUTION
T
he
gg
adisassemble
power
uses
athis
24 VDC
power
supply.
esure
or
outside
an
AC
ran
cause
product
D
og
not
or modify
the
N-L1.Usin
This may cause
failure.failure.
E
N
-R2-IM
1
CAUTION
Do not use the N-R4 in an environment subject to

flammable, explosive, or corrosive gases.
Be sure that all screws are tightened securely.
Use crimp contacts of the specified size for wiring.
The N-R4 uses a 24 VDC power supply. Using a power
supply outside this range or an AC power supply may
Do not disassemble or modify the N-R4. This may cause
product failure.

product failure.
E N-R2-IM
For 422 connector
CAUTION
E N-R4-IM
For 422 connector

product failure.
E N-R4-IM
Label for the connectors

For 422 connector
Supply voltage
EN55011, Class A
EN55022, Class B
EN61000-6-2
EN61000-6-1
without notice.
Model
CE marking
The N-R4 conforms to the following essential requirements of the EU
directive.

specifications or if modified, its functions and performance cannot
be guaranteed.
When the product is used under the circumstances or environment

below, adhere to the limitations of the ratings and functions, take
countermeasures for safety precautions such as fail-safe installations
N-R2

digital equipment
Canada IC (Industry Canada regulations)

The N-R4 conforms to the following IC EMI regulations.
General precautions
If the N-R4 is used in any way other than described in the
When the N-R4 is used in combination with other instruments,
possible and extensive safety precautions are required.
CAUTION
UL508, UL60950-1
E207185, E167973
When using the N-R4 as a UL approved product, be sure to observe the

following installation and environment conditions.
Pollution degree 2
The N-R4 conforms to the following FCC EMI regulations.


For use in applications where death or serious property damage is
E N-R4-IM
Communication interface
RS-232C
24 VDC
N-L1
RS-422A/485 (Selectable with DIP switches)

USB connection
Ethernet connection
NX-50CL (CC-Link controller)

NX-50CL main unit (x 1)
CC-Link connector (x 1)
Instruction manual (x 1)
Instruction
Manual
SR-600-M-NO1-E
1-3
SR-H60W: Setting software
1
Overview
AutoID system integration/configuration software

AutoID Navigator DVD-ROM (x 1)
Other peripheral devices and options

N-410: RS-485 master unit
Used as a master unit when RS-485 communication is used.
Extension cable
NX-C03R : 3 m extension cable
NX-C05R: 5 m extension cable
Used to extend the cable between the SR-600 Series and dedicated
communication unit/network controller.
DV-90 Series: AutoID data controller
OP-80616: Conversion cable

Used to connect the SR-600 Series and DV-90 Series.
(Cable length: 0.2 m)
1-4
SR-600-M-NO1-E
1-2 Part Names and Functions

1
This section describes the part names and functions of the SR-600 Series, dedicated communication unit, and
network controller.
Overview
Installing the SR-600 Series

(8) IN LED
(1) Scanner
(2) Cord
(7) Multiple LED indicator
(11) TEST button
(9) OK/NG/ERR LED

(10) TUNE button
(6) Cable holder
(3) Connector (round connector)
(4) USB connector
Number
(1)
Name
Scanner
(5) USB connector cap
Function
Reads 2D codes and bar codes.
(2)
Cord
Cord length is 1.8 m.
(3)
Connector
(Round connector)
Connects to the power supply and communication unit (N-R2/UB/R4/L1). The connector
can be used for serial communication with external devices.
USB connector
Connects to a PC to change settings with AutoID Navigator. The connector is type A.

Cable length is 130 mm from the section where the cable splits.
USB connector
cap
When the USB connector is not in use, place the cap on the connector to prevent the entry
of dust and contact with surrounding metal objects.
Cable holder
When the USB connector is not in use, place the USB cable in the cable holder so that it
does not move around.
(7)
Multiple LED
indicator
Displays the operation status including the bank number upon successful decoding, reading
stability and operation mode.
(8)
IN LED
Lights up when an input terminal is on. (Default: The status of input terminal 1 is displayed.)
OK/NG/ERR LED
When OK output is ON: The green LED light turns on.

When NG output is ON: The orange LED light turns on.
When ERR output is ON: The red LED light turns on.
TUNE button
Use this button to perform the following operations:

Turn on the laser pointer for reading position adjustment
Display the number of parameter banks in which settings have been registered (Up to
16 banks)
Start parameter tuning
Read all of the program codes
Reset errors
TEST button
Use this button to perform the following operations:

Start and stop test mode
Run 1 reading operation
Run the multi-reading mode
Set the communication settings to the default values when sending and receiving the
settings
(4)
(5)
(6)
(9)
(10)
(11)
SR-600-M-NO1-E
1-5
Operation status on the multiple LED indicator
Overview
Run mode
In Run mode, the multiple LED displays a number, letter, or other symbol.
Multiple LED
indicator
Display
content
Operation
Meaning
When reading
successful
The parameter bank number is displayed (1 to 16).

When OK: OK LED lights up
When NG: NG LED lights up
To indicate parameter bank numbers 10 to 16, the value of the
first digit and "1" are displayed alternately.
(
3-3 Alternate Function)
Preset
Preset successful
OK LED lights up
(
3-4 Preset/Verification)
2 points
light up
Laser pointer on
Press the
2 points
flashing
Communication
initialization
button for at least 6 seconds. The LED

Press and hold the
flashes and the communication condition returns to the factory
default state.
TUNE button lock
The
button is locked according to the settings. The laser
pointer cannot be turned on and quick calibration cannot be
performed.
Saving image
The LED lights up while an image is being written into the ROM.
(
3-9 Image Saving Function)
NG
button quickly to turn on the laser pointer.
Test mode
In Test mode, the multiple LED displays bars for the measurement results.
(
3-5 Test Mode)

Multiple LED
status
Reading rate
settings
Processing time
(ms)
Position
Burst
reading (ms)
OK/NG/ERR LED
90 to 100
Up to 99
LEVEL 5
Up to 199
Green
70 to 80
100 to 199
LEVEL 4
200 to 399
Green
50 to 60
200 to 299
LEVEL 3
400 to 599
Green
30 to 40
300 to 399
LEVEL 2
600 to 799
Green
10 to 20
400 or more
LEVEL 1
800 or more
Green
5 bars lit
4 bars lit
3 bars lit
2 bars lit
1 bar lit
0 bars lit
Reading error
1-6
Red
SR-600-M-NO1-E
Program mode
In Program mode, the multiple LED displays bars, a number, or a letter.
Program
mode
USB control
Program all
Quick
calibration
SR-600-M-NO1-E
Display content
Bar LED flashes
Overview
Multiple LED
indicator
Meaning
In Program mode
When the SR-600 enters USB control mode

When settings are being written in USB control mode
("U" and five LEDs light up alternately.)
Start reading
Reading successful or program successful
Reading failed or program failed
Quick calibration failed

(Data for successful quick calibration was not provided.)
Quick calibration failed

(Data for successful quick calibration was provided.)
Saving complete
1-7
Overview
N-R2
(1) Head port
(2) Power LED

(3) Communication status LED
(4) RS232C port
(5) I/O status LED

(6) I/O terminals
(7) Power supply terminals
(8) DIN rail mounting tab
Number
1-8
Name
Function
(1)
Head port
Used to connect the head.
(2)
Power LED
Lights when the power is ON.
(3)
Communication status LED
Monitors the status of communication with the head.
(4)
RS-232C port
Used to connect to the host (personal computer, PLC).
(5)
I/O status LED
Monitors the ON/OFF status of the I/O terminals.
(6)
I/O terminals
Used to connect I/O signal lines of control units.
(7)
Power supply terminals
Terminal for 24 VDC power supply input.
(8)
DIN rail mounting tab
Used to secure the NX-50 Series to a DIN rail.
SR-600-M-NO1-E
N-R4
(1) Head port
Overview
(2) Power LED
(9) RS-422A/485 selection switch
(4) RS-422A/485 connector
(5) I/O status LED

(6) I/O terminals
(10) Terminating resistance switch
(7) Power supply terminal

Number
Name
Function
(1)
Head port
(2)
Power LED
(3)
(4)
RS-422A/485 connector
Used to connect to the host (personal computer, PLC).
(5)
I/O status LED
(6)
I/O terminals
(7)
Terminal for 24 V DC power supply input.
(8)
(9)
RS-422A/485 selection switch
Used to switch between RS-422A and 485 communication.
(10)
Terminating resistance switch
Used to switch between ON and OFF for terminating resistance.
States of RS-422A/485 selection switch and terminating resistance switch

Number
RS-422A communication mode
RS-485 communication mode
Terminating resistance ON
Left
Right
Left
Right
Right
* Default factory settings are RS-485 communication and the terminating resistance set to the OFF position.
SR-600-M-NO1-E
1-9
N-UB
1
Overview
(1) Head port

(2) Power LED
(4) USB port
(5) I/O status LED

(6) I/O terminals
Number
Name
Function
(1)
Head port
(2)
Power LED
(3)
(4)
USB port
Used to connect to a personal computer.
(5)
I/O status LED
(6)
I/O terminals
(7)
Terminal for 24 VDC power supply input.
(8)
N-L1
(1) Head port
(2) Power LED
(4) LINK LED
(11) RESET/RUN switch
(5) 100/10 LED

(6) Ethernet connection port
(7) I/O status LED

(8) I/O terminals
Number
Function
Head port
(2)
Power LED
(3)
(4)
LINK LED
Lights when communication with an Ethernet unit is established.
100/10 LED
Lights when there is 100 Mbps communication. Off when there is 10 Mbps
communication.
(6)
Ethernet connection port
Used to connect to an Ethernet unit.
(7)
I/O status LED
(8)
I/O terminals
(9)
Terminal for 24 V DC power supply input.
(10)
(11)
RESET/RUN switch
Used to switch the setting/run mode.
(5)
1-10
Name
(1)
SR-600-M-NO1-E
Field Network Controller
Overview
NX-50CL
(1) Terminating resistance switch
(6) Display
(7) Network
communication status
LEDs
(2) RS-232C connector
(8) Head
communication
status LEDs
(3) Field network connectors
(9) Operation buttons
(4) Power supply

terminals
(10) Head connector
(5) I/O terminals
(11) DIN rail

mounting tab
Number
Name
(1)
Description
Terminating resistance switch
Used to turn on/off the termination resistor (TERMINATOR).

Set this switch to ON when the NX-50CL is connected at the end of the
trunk line. Otherwise, set this switch to OFF.
(2)
RS-232C connector
Used to connect a PC.
(3)
Field network connectors
Used to connect a field network.
This terminal block is used to connect a 24 VDC power supply. The FG

terminal must be connected to a class D ground.
(5)
I/O terminals
Used to connect a PLC or other I/O devices (NPN/PNP).
(6)
Display
Shows the status of the NX-50CL.
(7)
Network communication status

LEDs
Shows the status of the network communication.
Head communication status LEDs
Shows the status of communication with the head as follows:

ACCESS: Lights when communicating with the head.
M1/OK: Lights when an OK signal is output from the head.
M2/NG: Lights when an NG signal is output from the head.
M3/ERR: Lights when an ERR signal is output from the head.
(4)
(8)
(9)
Operation buttons
Used to operate the NX-50CL.
(10)
Head connector
Used to connect the SR-600 Series.
(11)
SR-600-M-NO1-E
1-11
1-3 System Configuration and Setup Flow

System Configuration
The SR-600 Series is used with the following devices.
Overview
Dedicated communication
unit
Installing the SR-600

Series
N-UB
N-R2
N-R4
N-L1
Setup tool
Network controller
PC
NX-50CL
AutoID data controller
AutoID Navigator
integration/
configuration software
DV-90
OP-80616
1-12
SR-600-M-NO1-E
1
Overview
For setup
Setup PC
USB
USB
Host
RS-232C
PC
RS-422A
RS-485
RS-485
Master unit
PLC
Ethernet
PLC
(CC-Link master unit)
CC-Link
PLC
Parallel output
SR-600-M-NO1-E
1-13
Setup Flow
Overview
This section describes the flow of the setup procedure required for starting the operation of the SR-600 Series.
After unpacking the package, first check the contents.

"Chapter 1 Overview"
Connect the SR-600 Series to a communication unit or a PC.

"Chapter 2 Connection and Wiring"
Use the AutoID Navigator to configure and send settings to the SR-600 Series.
"Chapter 5 AutoID Navigator Functions and Operation"
Mount the SR-600 Series according to the location.

"Chapter 6 Mounting the SR-600 Series"
Adjust the reading conditions of the SR-600 Series.

"Chapter 3 SR-600 Series Functions"
Start the operation.
1-14
SR-600-M-NO1-E
Connection and Wiring

This chapter describes the connection and wiring between the SR-600 Series
and communication unit/peripheral devices.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Connecting the SR-600 Series to the Dedicated

Communication Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Connecting the SR-600 Series to a PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Wiring the Dedicated Communication Unit . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Connecting the Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Connection when not using a Communication Unit . . 2-31
2-1
2-1 Connecting the SR-600 Series to the Dedicated Communication Unit

Connect the SR-600 Series to the head port of the dedicated communication unit (N-R2/R4/UB/L1).
Connection illustration
2
The SR-600 Series and dedicated communication unit are connected in the following way:
* Although the figure shows the model "N-R2", the head port is located in the same position for all models.
Pin layout of the head port

12-pin round jack
2-2
Name
OUT1
For OUT1 input
OUT2
For OUT2 input
Input
RXD
RS-232C transmission
Input
RS-232C transmission permitted
Input
RTS
10
OUT4
For OUT4 input
Input
12
11
IN2
For IN2 output
Output
Output
CAUTION
TIP
Signal name
Signal
direction
Pin no.
Output
TXD
RS-232C send
CTS
RS-232C send permitted
OUT3
10
IN1
For IN1 input
Output
11
+5V
+5V power
Output
12
GND (SG)
For OUT3 input
Common GND
Input
Input
Install and remove connection cables with the power OFF.
To extend the cable between the SR-600 Series and dedicated communication unit, use the optional
extension cable NX-C03R (cable length: 3m) or NX-C05R (cable length: 5m).
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-2 Connecting the SR-600 Series to a PC

Connect the USB connector of the SR-600 Series to a PC (personal computer).
For power supply
To the USB port

of a PC
Note
Power is not supplied to the SR-600 Series through the USB connection. Make sure to supply power
through the round connector.
You cannot connect multiple SR-600s to a single PC through USB connections at the same time.
Installing the USB Driver

To use the SR-600 Series by connecting it to a PC, you need to install the USB driver.
Precautions to consider when installing drivers:

Applicable operating systems (OS) are Windows 8/7/Vista/XP.
When you install the USB driver for the SR-600 Series for the first time, start up the PC first and then connect the
SR-600 Series to the USB port of the PC. If you start up the PC after connecting the SR-600 Series to the USB
port, the installation will not proceed properly.
Precautions to consider when connecting to a PC:

It may take several seconds before the PC recognizes or ends the connection of a USB device. Consequently,
wait at least 10 seconds before connecting/disconnecting the USB device.
Do not connect/disconnect the USB connector while the PC is in standby mode (suspended).
Do not connect/disconnect other USB devices while the PC is processing the connection of the SR-600.
If you disconnect the USB cable while the SR-600 is communicating with the PC, not only may data be lost, but
damage to the system may also occur. Do not disconnect the USB cable during communication.
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-3
Driver installation procedure

This section assumes that the USB driver will be installed on a Windows XP-based computer with the following drive
configuration:
Drive C : Hard disk drive
Drive E : DVD-ROM drive
2
Turn on the PC and start Windows.
Note
To install the USB driver, log on as a user with rights to change the system configuration, such as
Administrator or Computer Administrator.
Quit all active applications before starting the installation. The installation may take longer if antivirus
software or other applications are active on the computer.
Insert the "AutoID Navigator" into the DVD-ROM drive of the PC.
Connect the SR-600 Series to the PC.
Select "Install the software automatically (Recommended)" and click Next.
Select "Search for the best driver in these locations.", select the "Include this location in the search:" check box, and
type "E:\usbdrv\" in the location box.
2-4
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Click Continue Anyway.
2
Click Finish.
The USB driver for the SR-600 Series has been installed.
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-5
When the SR-600 Series USB driver is installed properly

In the Device Manager window, "KEYENCE SR-600" is displayed under "Universal Serial Bus controllers".
2
In this case, the SR-600 Series can be configured with AutoID Navigator through the USB connection.
CAUTION
2-6
Only one SR-600 Series can be connected to a PC.
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-3 Wiring the Dedicated Communication Unit

This section describes the wiring of the N-R2/R4/UB/L1 dedicated communication unit.
Connecting the DC Power Supply
This section describes how to connect the power supply.
Connecting the power supply terminal

Connect the 24 V DC power supply to the power supply terminal block as shown in the figure.
Twisted pair cable

Power supply
24 V DC
+10%
-20%
* Although the figure shows the model "N-R2", the power

supply terminals are located in the same position for all
models.
CAUTION
Do not use a power supply other than 24 V DC. Doing so may damage to the unit.
Applicable terminals for power supply connection

The dimensions of crimp contacts used for wiring should be as follows:
Terminal
Dimensions
Round terminal
a 6.0 mm max.
Y terminal
a 6.0 mm max.
Item
Description
Wire size
AWG 14 to 22
Tightening torque
0.49 Nm (4.34 lbfin)
Wire material
Copper
Wire type
Stranded wire
Electric wire temperature rating
+60C
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-7
I/O Terminal Layout and Wiring
I/O terminal layout
These terminals are used to connect I/O devices such as a PLC.

Symbol
name
INCOM
IN1
IN2
OUTCOM
Signal
direction
Explanation
Common for IN terminal
Used as an input terminal to the code

reader.
Input
Common for OUT terminal
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
Used as an output terminal from the

code reader.
Output
* Although the figure shows the model "N-R2",
the I/O terminals are located in the same
position for all models.
OUT4
CAUTION
TIP
For connection, use stranded copper wire with a gauge of AWG16 to 26.
Limit the tightening torque for the terminal block screws to 0.19 Nm (1.7 Lbfin) or less.
The power supply terminal block and the I/O terminal block are insulated from each other.
The INCOM and OUTCOM terminals are insulated from each other.
Applicable crimp terminal

Use a bar terminal with the following dimensions for the connection:
3.5 mm or less
1.5 mm or less
5 mm or more
Wiring the IN1 and IN2 terminals

The IN1 and IN2 terminals are used to input trigger signals, preset registration data, or to conduct quick tuning for
the SR-600.
The inputs are energized when 15 to 26.4 V DC is connected between the corresponding input terminals.
Circuit diagram
INCOM
2-8
Internal circuit
IN1, IN2
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Connecting a photoelectric sensor manufactured by KEYENCE

For this connection, the IN1 terminal is used as the trigger input terminal.
2
Photoelectric Sensor
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
Wiring the OUT 1 through OUT 4 terminals

The OUT terminals can be used to verify OK/NG readings and other status outputs from the SR-600 Series.
The output form is photo MOS relay.
Circuit diagram
Load
Load
Load
Load
Internal Circuit
OUT1 to OUT4
Load
OUTCOM
Connection to a PLC (programmable logic controller) manufactured by KEYENCE
PLC
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-9
Wiring an RS-232C Port Device (N-R2)
Pin layout of the RS-232C port
The pin layout of the RS-232C port of the N-R2 is as follows:
1 2 3 4 5
D-sub 9 pin (male)
DTE specification (terminal definition)
#4-40 screw (female)
6 7 8 9
2-10
Pin no.
Symbol name
RD (RXD)
Data reception
Explanation
SD (TXD)
Data transmission
Output
ER (DTR)
Connected to Pin 6 internally
Output
SG
DR (DSR)
Connected to Pin 4 internally
RS (RTS)
Transmission request (always ON)
CS (CTS)
Transmission permitted
Signal ground
Signal direction
Input
Input
Output
Input
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Wiring the RS-232C cable

Connect the N-R2 to a host device (PC, PLC, etc.) according to the following wiring diagram:
Connection to a PC
N-R2
Connector case
RD
SD
RS
CS
ER
DR
SG
DOS/V PC
Connector case
2
3
7
8
4
6
5
2
3
7
8
4
6
5
D-sub 9 pin (female)

#4-40 screw
* Connect using our optional

cable: OP-27937 (2m).
RD
SD
RS
CS
ER
DR
SG

#4-40 screw
Connection to the handheld programmer for the KEYENCE, KV Series

Handheld programmer
RD
SD
SG
N-R2
3
5
2
3
7
8
4
6
5
Modular connector
RD
SD
RS
CS
* Connect using our optional

cables:
OP-26487(2.5m) and
OP-26486.
ER
DR
SG

#4-40 screw
Connection to the KV-L21V/L20V/L20R/N10L

KV-L21V/L20V/L20R(PORT1)
KV-N10L
FG
RD
SD
RS
CS
ER
DR
9
2
3
7
8
4
6
5
SG
D-sub 9 pin
(female)
#4-40 screw
N-R2
2
3
7
8
4
6
5
KV-L21V/L20V/L20R(PORT2)
Connector
case
RD
SD
SD
RD
3
5
RS
CS
ER
DR
SG
D-sub 9 pin
(female)
#4-40 screw
SG 1
Terminal
block
N-R2
2
3
7
8
4
6
5
Connector
case
RD
SD
RS
CS
ER
DR
SG
D-sub 9 pin
(female)
#4-40 screw
* Connect using our optional cable: OP-27937 (2m).
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-11
Connection to a MELSEC Series PLC

AJ71UC24
AJ71QC24N/-R2
A1SJ71UC24-R2/PR
A1SJ71QC24N/-R2
QJ71C24N/-R2
Link unit
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
SG
CD
N-R2
Connector
case
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
20
ER
D-sub 9 pin
(male)
M2.6 screw
2
3
7
8
4
5
6
RD
RD
SD
SD
RS
RS
CS
CS
ER
ER
SG
DR
DR
SG
D-sub 9 pin
(female)
#4-40 screw
N-R2
Link unit
Connector
case
Connector
case
2
3
7
8
4
6
5
1
2
3
7
8
4
6
5
CD
D-sub 9 pin
(male)
M2.6 screw
RD
SD
RS
CS
ER
DR
SG
D-sub 9 pin
(female)
#4-40 screw
Connection to a SYSMAC Series PLC

CS1W-SCB**-V1
CS1W-SCU**-V1
CJ1W-SCU**-V1
CP1W-CIF01
PLC
Connector
case
1
2
3
4
5
9
2
3
7
8
5
D-sub 9 pin
(male)
M2.6 screw
D-sub 9 pin
(female)
#4-40 screw
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
2-12
N-R2
RD
SD
RS
CS
SG
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Wiring to an RS-422A/485 Port Device (N-R4)
Terminal layout of the RS-422A connector
Explanation
Signal direction
SD+
Data transmission + side
Output
SD
Data transmission side
Output
SG
Signal ground
RD+
Data reception + side
Input
RD
Data reception side
Input
* The connector is labeled with the RS-485 terminal layout. To use RS-422A, attach the label showing the RS-422A
terminal layout.
Note
The extended distance of the cable must not exceed 1.2 km.
Set the terminating resistance switch/termination resistor (100 ) of both the N-R4 and external
device to ON.
Wiring the RS-422A cable

Use a twisted pair cable to establish an RS-422A connection.
Recommended RS-422A cable (with shield)
Manufacturer:
NIHON ELECTRIC WIRE & CABLE Co., LTD.
Product name:
Instrumentation cable
Model
KNPEV-SB 0.75 mm2 x 2P
Wiring a general RS-422A device

External device (N-R4)
N-R4
SG
SG
RD+
SD+
RD-
SD-
SD+
RD+
SD-
RD-
Twisted pair cable
KV-L20V/L20R RS-422A
KV-L20R Port 2
N-R4
SG
SG
RDB
SD+
RDA
SD-
SDB
RD+
SDA
RD-
Twisted pair cable
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-13
Symbol name
Terminal layout of the RS-485 connector
485+
Symbol name
485
SG
Explanation
Signal direction
485+
RS-485 + side
I/O
485
RS-485 side
I/O
SG
Signal ground
Not used
Note
The extended distance of the cable must not exceed 1.2 km.
Set the terminating resistance switch (100) of the N-R4 located at the end of the RS-485 trunk line to
ON.
To use the multi-drop connection, the N-410 master unit must be used.
Wiring the RS-485

Use a twisted pair cable for RS-485 connection.
Recommended RS-485 cable
Manufacturer: THE FURUKAWA ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Product name: Instrumentation cable
KPEV-SB (1P) 0.75 mm2
Model
N-410 (Multi-drop communication)

N-410*
N-R4*
N-R4
N-R4
485+
485+
485+
RS-485+
485-
485-
485-
RS-485-
SG
SG
SG
RS-485 SG
* For N-R4 and N-410, turn terminating resistance ON.
Up to 31 N-R4 units can be connected to a single N-410.

Limit the total extension of the RS-485 cables to 1.2 km.
Note
Do not supply power to the N-R4 from the 24 V DC OUT terminal of the N-410.
Never use a terminal block connection at a midpoint of the RS-485 cable connection.
Avoid branching of the RS-485 connection as shown in the figure below:
(With a branch)
N-R4
N-R4
N-R4
(No branch)
N-410
N-R4*
N-R4
N-410*
N-R4
* Terminator ON
2-14
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Preparing the communication cable
Remove about 70 mm of the cable's sheath.
Sheath
Approx. 70 mm
Cover the bare shield wires and the sheath portion with a shrinkable tube about 40 mm in length.
Shrinkable tube
Approx. 40 mm
Strand together the shield mesh wires as illustrated in the example below and then prepare the insulated
wires. (5 wires are required for RS-422A and 3 wires are required for RS-485)
Stranded shield wires
Insulated wire
Remove about 8mm of insulation from each wire.
Approx. 8 mm
Perform preliminary soldering on each wire about 6 mm from the tip.

The external diameter of the soldered wire must not exceed 2 mm.
2 mm or less
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-15
RS-422A/RS-485 selection switch and terminating resistance switch

Before using the N-R4, select either RS-422A or RS-485 communication using the switch on the unit.
Moreover, when the N-R4 is located at the end of the communication line, set the terminating resistance switch
(100) to ON.
Set the switches according to the table below:
2
Number
RS-422A
communication
mode
RS-485
communication
mode
Terminating
resistance ON
(1)
Left
Right
(2)
Left
Right
(3)
Right
* The factory setting is RS-485 communication mode and terminating

resistance OFF.
2-16
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Wiring a USB Port Device (N-UB)
The USB port of the N-UB can only be connected to a computer (PC).
Connect the type B side of the USB cable to the N-UB.
Important
When using the N-UB to connect to a PC, be sure to set the RTS/CTS protocol setting of the SR-600
Series to < Enable >.
USB cable
To the USB port of the PC
Note
The length of the USB cable must be 5 m or less.

Constant vibration may result in a loose USB connection or a communication error.
In such cases, take appropriate measures to insulate the N-UB from vibration or to better secure the
USB cable.
Installing the USB driver

To connect the N-UB to a PC, you need to install the USB driver.
Precautions to consider when installing the drivers:

Applicable operating systems (OS) are Windows 8/7/Vista/XP.
Do not turn on the PC with the N-UB connected to the PC's USB port before installing the USB driver of the N-UB.
This may cause the installation of the USB driver to start during the booting process of Windows, resulting in
improper installation.
Precautions to consider when connecting to a PC:

It may take several seconds before the PC recognizes or ends the connection of a USB device. Consequently,
wait at least 10 seconds before connecting/disconnecting the USB device.
Do not connect/disconnect the N-UB device while the PC is in standby mode (suspended).
Do not connect/disconnect other USB devices while the PC is processing the connection of the N-UB.
If you disconnect the USB cable while the N-UB is communicating with the PC, not only may data be lost, but
damage to the system may also occur. Do not disconnect the USB cable during communication.
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-17
Driver installation procedure

This section assumes that the USB driver will be installed on a Windows XP-based computer with the following drive
configuration:
Drive C
:Hard disk drive
Drive E
:DVD-ROM drive
2
Note
2
3
4
To install the USB driver, log on as a user with rights to change the system configuration, such as
Quit all active applications before starting the installation. The installation may take longer if antivirus
software or other applications are active on the computer.
Insert the "AutoID Navigator" into the DVD-ROM drive of the PC.
Use Windows Explorer or another method to open the DVD-ROM drive, and double-click
"N-UBVCInstaller.exe" in the Drive folder.
Click the Install button.
Folder containing the USB driver.
Click OK and restart the PC.
When the PC is restarted, connect the N-UB to the PC.
2-18
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Select "Install the software automatically (Recommended)" and click Next.
2
10Click Finish.
The USB driver of the N-UB has been installed.
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-19
When the N-UB USB driver is installed properly

In the Device Manager window, "KEYENCE N-UB" is displayed under "Ports (COM & LPT)".
2
In this case, the N-UB can be used as a normal COM port with AutoID Navigator.
CAUTION
2-20
Only one N-UB can be connected to a PC.

Even if several N-UBs are connected, only one COM port No. is occupied.
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Driver removal procedure

This section describes the procedure to uninstall the USB driver of the N-UB from a Windows XP-based computer.
3
4
5
6
7
Note
To uninstall the USB driver, log on as a user with rights to change the system configuration, such as
Select Start - Control Panel (C).

The [Control Panel] window appears.
Double-click the Add or Remove Programs icon.
The [Add or Remove Programs] window appears.
Select "KEYENCE N-UB" and click the Remove button.
When the program removal confirmation screen is displayed, click the Next button.
The [Removal Confirmation] window appears.
Click the Yes button.
The [N-UB Uninstaller Process Completed] window appears.
Click "Yes" to continue. Click the Finish button.
The USB driver of the N-UB has been uninstalled.
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-21
Wiring a LAN Port Device (N-L1)
Use a "straight cable" when connecting an N-L1 to a hub; use a "crossover cable" when connecting it to a computer
(PC) directly.
HUB
Straight cable
Crossover cable
PC
Use a cable that is category 5 or higher. (Both STP and UTP can be used)
The extended length must not exceed 100 m.
CAUTION
The N-L1 does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet).

Be sure to supply 24 V DC power to the power terminal.
* For the N-L1 setting procedure, refer to
Important
2-22
"Chapter 9 Ethernet Communication".
When using the N-L1, be sure to set the RTS/CTS protocol setting of the SR-600 Series to < Enable >.
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-4 Connecting the Network Controller

This section describes how to connect a network controller and an SR-600 Series device, as well as the wiring of the
power supply and I/O terminals.
Connecting the SR-600 Series to the NX-50CL Network Controller
The NX-50CL has the following connection ports:
RS-232C connector
Field network connectors

"Wiring a Field Network" (Page 2-27)

"Connecting the DC Power Supply"
(Page 2-7)
I/O terminal NPN/PNP

"I/O Terminal Layout and Wiring" (Page 2-
Head connector to connect the

SR-600 Series
8)
"Connection illustration" (below)
Connection Illustration
The SR-600 Series and the NX-50CL unit are connected as seen below:
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-23
Pin layout of the head port
12-pin round jack
TIP
10
12
11
Pin no.
Name
OUT1
For OUT1 input
Signal name
OUT2
For OUT2 input
RXD
RTS
OUT4
For OUT4 input
IN2
For IN2 output
TXD
RS-232C send
CTS
RS-232C send permitted
OUT3
10
IN1
For IN1 input
11
5V
+5V power
12
GND (SG)
For OUT3 input
Common GND
To extend the cable between the SR-600 Series and the NX-50CL, use the optional extension cable NXC03R (cable length: 3m) or NX-C05R (cable length: 5m).
DC power supply
This section describes the connection to the power supply.
Connecting the power supply terminal

Connect the 24 V DC power supply to the power supply terminal block as shown in the figure below:
Power
supply
Protective
grounding
24 V DC 10%
Twist
24 V DC 0V
CAUTION
2-24
Use a 24 V DC Class 2 power supply.

Be sure to provide a Class D ground (ground resistance: 100 max.).
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Applicable terminals for power supply connection

The dimensions of crimp contacts used for wiring should be as follows:
Dimensions
a: 8.0 mm max.
Y terminal
a: 6.0 mm max.
Item
Description
Wire size
AWG14 to 20
Tightening torque
0.51 Nm 4.5 lbfin
Wire material
Copper
Wire type
Stranded wire
Electric wire
temperature rating
+60C
2
Terminal
Round Terminal
I/O Terminal Layout and Connection

I/O terminal layout diagram
These terminals are used to input/output NPN or PNP signals to/from an I/O device such as a PLC.
Both NPN connectors and PNP connectors are provided.
NPN connector
PNP connector
CAUTION
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Use AWG16 to AWG30 wire for connection.

The terminal block contains two types of connectors: Those for NPN outputs and for PNP
outputs.
Pay particular attention to the output type (NPN/PNP). Incorrect wiring may cause product
failure.
Do not use the NPN and PNP input circuits at the same time because they are internally
connected.
The OUT and IN terminals of the power supply terminal block and I/O terminal block are
insulated from each other.
The INCOM and OUTCOM terminals are short-circuited internally.
The NPN and PNP input circuits are internally connected. Do not connect other wiring.
2-25
Wiring and circuit diagram of the NPN connectors

Connecting an NPN output type PLC or other device to the input terminals of the NX-50CL
External device
Photocoupler isolation
3.3k
OUT(NPN)
Internal circuit
IN*(NPN)
430
COM
COMIN(NPN)
Connecting the NPN output of the NX-50CL to a PLC or other device
IN
OUT*(NPN)
33V
COM
Internal circuit
External device
680
COMOUT(NPN)
Wiring and circuit diagram of the PNP connectors

Connecting a PNP output type PLC or other device to the input terminals of the NX-50CL
3.3k
COM
Internal circuit
External device
IN*(PNP)
430
OUT(PNP)
COMIN(PNP)
External device
680
COM
COMOUT(PNP)
33V
IN
2-26
OUT*(PNP)
Photocoupler
isolation
Internal circuit
Connecting the PNP output of the NX-50CL to a PLC or other device
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Wiring a Field Network
Preparing the communication cable
Select the type of communication cable according to the field network to be connected.
Network controller
Recommended cable
CC-Link controller
NX-50CL
CC-Link dedicated cable (Version 1.10 or higher)
Remove the sheath (outer covering) of the cable.

Remove about 70 mm of the sheath on the cable.
Limit the exposure of the braided shield to 6 mm or less.
Sheath
6 mm or less
Braided shield
Approx. 70 mm
Cover the bare portion with a shrinkable tube.

Cover the bare insulated wires and the sheath portion with a shrinkable tube about 40 mm in length.
Sheath
Approx. 40 mm
Shrinkable tube
Remove the insulation from each wire.

Remove about 8 mm of insulation from each wire.
Insulated wire
Approx. 8 mm
Perform preliminary soldering on each bare wire approximately 6 mm from the tip.
The external diameter of the soldered wire must not exceed 0.17 mm.
Bare wire
0.17 mm or less
Approx. 8 mm
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-27
Connecting the communication cable

Connect the prepared communication cable to the field network connector.
2
TIP
The field network connector of the NX-50CL is a multi-drop connector which can be used for the multidrop connection of slave units.
Insert each signal wire into the appropriate hole of the connector.
Insert the wire into the connector.
Important
Fully loosen the clamp screws of the connector before inserting the signal wires.
Tighten the clamp screw of the connector to secure the signal wire.
Tighten the clamp screw.
2-28
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Wiring the CC-Link controller (NX-50CL)

The field network connector of the NX-50CL should be wired as follows:
DA
Signal name
DB
DA
Communication signal High
DB
Communication signal Low
DG
DG
Communication ground
SLD
Cable shield
FG
Frame ground
SLD
Function
FG
Important
Use a CC-Link dedicated cable (Version 1.10 or higher) to connect the CC-Link controller to CC-Link.
To connect the CC-Link controller to each station, ground the cable shield to FG.
Connection example
CC-Link dedicated cable (Ver. 1.10 or higher)
For the wiring of the CC-Link master unit, refer to the manual for the device used as the CC-Link master unit.
Important
SR-600-M-NO2-E
Set the terminating resistance switch to ON when the NX-50CL is connected at the end of the network.
2-29
Connecting to a PC
To connect the network controller to a PC in the system using RS-232C, use the optional RS-232C modular cable
(OP-26487) and D-sub 9-pin connector (OP-26486).
RS-232C modular cable

OP-26487
D-Sub 9 pin connector

OP-26486
Pin layout of the RS-232C modular connector

Network
controller side
Network
controller side
Pin no.
2-30
PC side
D-Sub 9 pin
Straight cable OP-26487

+
D-Sub 9 pin connector OP-26486
(Crossover connection)
Network
controller side
PC side
D-Sub 25 pin
Straight cable OP-26487

+
D-Sub 25 pin connector OP-26485
(Crossover connection)
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-5 Connection when not using a Communication Unit

This section describes the connection and wiring when no communication unit is used.
Pin Layout and Connection of SR-600 Series Connector
2
Pin layout
The connector of the SR-600 Series has the following pin layout:
SR-600 pin position
RP17-13PA-12 PC plug male
1
10
Manufactured by
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
11 12
Pin no.
Wire color
Symbol name
White
OUT1
Output pin 1 (default: OK output)
Explanation
Signal direction
Output
Gray
OUT2
Output pin 2 (default: NG/ERROR output)
Output
Purple
TXD
RS-232C send
Output
Blue
CTS
RS-232C send OK
Light blue
OUT4
Output pin 4 (default: BUSY output)
Output
Input
Input
Green
IN2
Input pin 2 (default: PRESET input)
Brown
RXD
Pink
RTS
Output
Output pin 3 (default: ERROR output)
Output
Input
Orange
OUT3
10
Yellow
IN1
Input pin 1 (default: TIMING input)
Input
11
Red
5V
+5V power
Input
12
Black
GND (SG)
Common GND
* The shield line is directly connected to the common GND.
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-31
Connecting the power source
+5V
11
GND
12
2
DC5V
Note
Reverse connection of the power supply is strictly prohibited. Doing so may cause damage to the unit.
Use a stable power supply of 5 V DC 5%. Using a power supply outside this range may cause
product failure.
Following UL standards, use a power supply of NEC Class 2.
Input terminal 1 and Input terminal 2 wiring
Internal circuit
These are non-voltage inputs. Connect relay contacts or NPN open collector outputs.
The TIMING and PRESET inputs are non-voltage inputs.
10k
4.7k
220
IN
GND
6,10
12
Contact
or
non-contact
DC5V
TIMING (Input terminal 1) is input to initiate the 2D code and bar code reading.
PRESET (Input terminal 2) is input to preset (register) the 2D code and bar code data on the SR-600 Series.
Output terminal 1, Output terminal 2, Output terminal 3 and Output terminal 4

wiring
Internal circuit
These are NPN open collector outputs.
4.7k
47k
OUT
33V
1, 2,
5, 9
Load
12
GND
* Rated load: 24 V DC (30 mA) or less
OUT 1 (OK) output is used to indicate that reading has been successfully completed and that the comparison
and matching with preset data is judged OK.
OUT 2 (NG/ERROR) output is used to indicate that reading has failed and that the comparison and matching with
preset data is judged as NG.
OUT 3 (ERROR) output is used to indicate that reading has failed.
OUT 4 (BUSY) is output any time the trigger input can not be accepted due to internal processing.
When BUSY is output, TIMING (Input terminal 1) cannot be input.
2-32
SR-600-M-NO2-E
RS-232C wiring
When connecting the SR-600 Series to the PC, connect as shown below:
SR-600 Series
RxD(RD)
CTS
RTS(RS)
RxD
TxD(SD)
RTS
CTS(CS)
GND 12
GND(SG)
+5V 11
DTR(ER)
DSR(DR)
TxD
Round connector
12 pin
(male)
DOS/V PC
D-sub 9 pin
(female)
#4-40 screw
OP-80616 wiring diagram

The following wiring diagram shows the conversion cable OP-80616.
Cable is 200 mm long.
D-sub 9-pin
(female)
Connector
TIMING
10
TIM
RXD
RD
TXD
SD
OK
OK
NG
GND
RTS
NG
CTS
RS
+5V
11
CS
BUSY
+5V
PRESET
Connector case
GND(SG)
12
Round 12-pin
(female)
TIP
D-sub 9-pin
(female)
#4-40 sc rew
Round 12-pin connector
RP-17-13JA-12SC(71)
Made by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
D-Sub 9-pin connector
JEZ-9S-3
Connector case
J-SC9A
J-SC9B
Made by J.S.T. Connector
SR-600-M-NO2-E
2-33
MEMO
2
2-34
SR-600-M-NO2-E
3
3
SR-600 Series Functions

This section describes the functions of the SR-600 Series.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
SR-600-M-NO3-E
Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Quick Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Alternate Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Preset/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Multi-I/O Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Quick Setup Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Preventive Maintenance Information (PMI) . . . . . . 3-22
Image Saving Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-1
3-1 Basic Operation

SR-600 Operation Buttons
The SR-600 Series has two buttons: the TUNE button and the TEST button.
These two buttons are used to operate various functions of the SR-600 Series.
TUNE Button
Use the
button to configure or confirm the mounting and settings.
Operation
Multiple LED
indicator
Action
Press once quickly

(less than 1 s)
The laser pointer emits a laser beam.

(Reading is disabled while the laser pointer is on.)
Press for 2 seconds
Activates the quick calibration function.

"3-2 Quick Calibration" (Page 3-4)
Press for 3 seconds
The number of parameter banks (0 to 16) for which the alternate

function can be used is shown on the multiple LED indicator. When
the number of parameter banks is between 10 and 16, the value of
the second digit and "1" are displayed alternately.
"3-3 Alternate Function" (Page 3-7)
Press for 4 seconds
Activates the batch setting reading mode.

"3-7 Quick Setup Code" (Page 3-21)
* To quit an action/mode, press the

button once briefly.
To quit the quick calibration, hold down the
button for at least 2 seconds.
TEST Button
Use the
button to run the functions in test mode.

Operation
Multiple LED
indicator
Action
Press once quickly

(less than 1 s)
One reading operation is performed.
Press for 2 seconds
Activates the reading rate test mode.

"Reading rate test mode" (Page 3-13)
Press for 3 seconds
Activates the tact measurement test mode.

"Processing time test mode" (Page 3-14)
Press for 4 seconds
Activates the bar code position test mode.

"Position test mode" (Page 3-15)
Press for 5 seconds
Runs the continuous reading mode 1.

"Continuous Reading Mode" (Page 4-11)
Press for 6 seconds
Returns the communication parameters to the factory default

settings.
* To quit an operation, press the

* The factory default communication parameter settings are as follows:
Baud rate : 115200 bit/s
Header
: None
Data bits : 8 bit
Terminator
: CR
Parity
: Even
Stop bit length
: 1 bit
3-2
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-1 Basic Operation
External Input Operation and Output Signals

The I/O terminals of the SR-600 Series are factory-configured as follows:
Terminal
Input terminal
Function
Trigger input
IN2
Register preset data
OUT1
OK
OUT2
NG/ERROR
OUT3
ERROR
Output setting
3
IN1
TRG BUSY
OUT4
USB BUSY
MODE BUSY
ERR BUSY
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-3
3-2 Quick Calibration

This section describes the Quick Calibration function.
Quick Calibration
The SR-600 Series can automatically adjust parameters for the target 2D codes or bar codes through the operation
of the unit itself and store the settings in its internal memory. This function is called "Quick Calibration".
The parameters are stored in a location called a "Parameter Bank". The SR-600 Series has 16 parameter banks.
3
For details of the parameters stored in the parameter banks, refer to "5-4 Configuration Settings".
Running Quick Calibration

The quick calibration can be activated in two ways: Using the button on the panel or using the input terminal.
Activation using the button on the panel

Use the button on the panel of the SR-600 Series to activate the quick calibration.
When the
button is held down for 2 seconds in Quick Calibration mode, the quick calibration is canceled and
the SR-600 Series returns to Run mode.
1
2
Set up the SR-600 Series and prepare the code that is going to be read.
Press the
button quickly to start the laser pointer emission and adjust the reading position.
After the adjustment, press the
button quickly to turn off the laser pointer.
38 mm
(SR-600HA)
60 mm
(SR-600)
100 mm
(SR-610)
"Adjusting the Reading and Installation Angle" (Page 6-4)
Press and hold the

button for two seconds to perform quick calibration.
During the quick calibration, the multiple LED indicator illuminates as shown
on the right.
Illuminating LEDs increase

upward.
Illuminates
3-4
SR-600-M-NO3-E
After the calibration, the reading rate measurement is performed automatically.

Once the calibration finishes successfully, the SR-600 Series starts the
reading rate measurement.
Check the level of reading stability on the multiple LED indicator.
"Reading rate test mode" (Page 3-13)
Reading rate
Test result display
3
If the reading failure continues for a certain period of time, the quick
calibration is performed again.
Illuminates
If the calibration fails, "F" or "H" is displayed.

By pressing the
button, you can perform the quick calibration again.
F: Displayed when the quick calibration failed.

Flash alternately
H: Displayed when the quick calibration was completed successfully but

the reading failed and another quick calibration was attempted but failed.
By pressing the
button, you can register the result of the successful
calibration.
Flash alternately
Press the
button and select the parameter bank in which to register the parameters.
Every time the
button is pressed, the parameter bank number changes
Parameter bank No.
by one.
When the initial settings have been changed for the parameter bank being
Indicates whether the
displayed, the OK/NG/ERROR LED illuminates in red.
initial settings have
To indicate parameter bank numbers 10 to 16, the value of the second digit
been changed or not.
and "1" are displayed alternately.
Green: Not changed.
Red: Changed
When the parameter bank in which to register the parameters is determined, press the
the parameters.
When the parameters are registered successfully, the multiple LED indicator
shows "d".
Note
button to register
Quick calibration can be used for 2D codes and bar codes which have been registered in "Code Setup".
To read other codes, you need to set the code using the AutoID Navigator.
For the setting procedure, refer to "5-3 Using AutoID Navigator".
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-5
Activation using the input terminal

By assigning "Quick Calibration" to an input terminal, you can use that terminal to activate the quick calibration.
"Functions assigned to the input terminals" (Page 3-17)
Turn on the input terminal to which the function has been assigned.
The quick calibration starts.
"1" is displayed.
Parameter bank 1 is overwritten with the calibration result and the TUNING
output turns on.
When the calibration fails, the OK/NG/ERROR LED illuminates in red, the
ERROR signal is output, and the calibration process ends.
Illuminates in green
Illuminates in red
Note
When the input terminal is used to activate the quick calibration, the calibration result is automatically
written to parameter bank No. 1.
Setting the Quick Calibration Conditions

You can set the conditions for the quick calibration using "Calibration Condition Setting" of the AutoID Navigator.
For the procedure and details of the setting, refer to "Processing setting" (Page 5-16).
Calibration condition setting items

The following items can be set in the calibration condition setting:
3-6
Calibration type
Select from Standard, Moving object, or Dot printing.
Exposure
The exposure time can be set when "Moving object" is selected for the
calibration type.
Offset
Set the offset value (black level) for the scanned data.
* Do not change the setting value under normal conditions.
Black-white/right-left reversing
Set whether to read codes which are black-white or right-left reversed.
Digital filter
Set whether to use the digital filter.
Internal/external light
Set whether to use the internal/external light.
ROI
Set the range of decoding.
Decode timeout
Set the upper limit of the time period for decoding.
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-3 Alternate Function

This section describes the alternate function.
Alternate Function
The SR-600 Series can switch between multiple parameter banks that are registered for the code being read while
performing the reading operation.
The "Alternate Function" automatically switches between parameter banks to perform stable readings using optimal
parameters, even when there are fluctuations in the marking conditions or reading distance.
By default, reading is performed using parameter bank 0 (bank for read quick setup code).
3
Alternate Function Operations

The following flow chart describes the operations that occur during the alternate function:
Start reading
Select parameter bank
YES
Scanning
Decoding
NO
Reading success
YES
Was reading
successful?
YES
NO
Decode timeout
period remains?
NO
Reading error
YES
Retry possible?
NO
Level trigger
turned off?
or
One-shot
timeout?
* Reading starts from the bank set as the "Alternate start bank".
Important
SR-600-M-NO3-E
Since the alternate function continues reading by changing the parameter banks one at a time, it
requires a longer time to select the parameter bank with optimum settings. (The processing time
depends on the decode timeout period setting.)
The alternate function is turned off by default. The function is enabled after settings are registered with
any of the parameter banks.
The alternate function is disabled in the following cases:
In Burst reading mode
When the alternate function is turned off for all parameter banks
When the bank specify trigger input command (LON01 to 16) is sent to directly specify the parameter
bank for reading (
"Direct Control Commands" (Page 7-12))
3-7
3-3 Alternate Function
Bank prioritizing function

When the bank prioritizing function is set to "Enable" and reading is completed successfully, the next reading starts
using the parameter bank for the successful reading.
When codes with the same reading conditions are repeatedly decoded, the reader can begin reading based on the
previous successful bank parameters, which may result in a shorter reading time.
Operation of the bank prioritizing function when parameter banks 1 to 3 are used
The reading order is changed to start reading from the parameter bank of the previous successful reading.
Reading
order
Parameter bank
No.
Reading
order
Parameter bank
No.
Note
3-8
Reading
Success
The bank prioritizing function is effective only in Run mode. The reading order is reset to the default
setting when one of the following operations is performed:
Stopping the power supply
Entering Program mode or Test mode
Sending the reset command (RESET)
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-4 Preset/Verification
This section describes the preset/verification function.
Preset/Verification Function
This function allows the SR-600 Series to verify the read code data against the registered code data (preset data),
and output an OK/NG signal to indicate whether or not they match. This allows the SR-600 Series to perform simple
detection of different codes without a sensor or other devices.
One set of preset data can be stored in the SR-600 Series (maximum 494 digits).
The starting digit (starting position) and range (number of digits) for the verification can be set in the preset data, so
even 2D codes with more than 494 digits can be verified.
Note
The verification starts at the specified starting position on the preset data and continues for the
specified number of digits. Data cannot be verified at multiple points.
To register several pieces of preset data, use the DV-90 Series AutoID data controller.
Registering preset data

Use one of the following procedures to register preset data in the SR-600 Series:
Read a target code by turning on the external input terminal.
(You need to assign the preset data registration function to the external input terminal in advance.)
assigned to the input terminals" (Page 3-17)
Set with the AutoID Navigator (
"Option" (Page 5-33))
Set with a setup command (
"Setting Commands" (Page 7-16))
"Functions
Output terminal operation

The output terminals perform the following operation:
Reading successful and matches with preset data .......................OK is output
Reading successful but does not match with preset data .............NG is output
Reading error ..................................................................................ERROR is output
Preset data is registered successfully. ...........................................PRESET output
Note
By default, the PRESET output is not assigned to any of the OUT1 to OUT4 terminals. To connect the
PRESET output to an external device, you need to assign the PRESET output to an appropriate OUT
terminal.
Functions of "!" and "?" in the preset data (wild cards)

Registering the preset data with "!" or "?" increases the flexibility when comparing and verifying the code data with
the preset data.
"!" ....... This character represents an unlimited number of digits and can be used when any character for any
number of digits is OK. If the preset data is "ABC!", all codes that begin with "ABC" are verified as a match.
If the preset data is "!ABC", all codes that end with "ABC" are verified as a match. One "!" can be used in the
preset data.
"?" ...... This character represents one digit and can be used when any one character is OK. If the preset data is
"AB??56", any two characters positioned in "??" are verified as a match. By default, the PRESET output is not
assigned to any of the OUT1 to OUT4 terminals. To send the PRESET output to an external device, you
need to assign the PRESET output to an appropriate OUT terminal.
TIP
SR-600-M-NO3-E
If no preset data is registered, the SR-600 Series automatically assumes that "!" is registered as the
preset data. Consequently, it outputs OK when it reads a bar code successfully and outputs ERROR
when it fails reading, regardless of the data of the bar code.
3-9
3-4 Preset/Verification
Automatic increment verification function

This function is used to verify numerical values by adding/subtracting a certain value to/from the preset value after
every verification.
When the verification is OK, a value is added to/subtracted from the preset value. When the verification is NG, no
calculation is performed.
This function allows verification of codes including numerical values which increase/decrease by a constant value,
such as workpiece serial numbers.
When the automatic increment verification is selected, a specified value is added to or subtracted from the first
numerical value read after the setup or power-on, and the resulting value is used as the preset data.
When the PRESET input terminal is turned on during the automatic increment verification, the current preset value is
cleared, and the data read next is used as the first read data.
3
The numerical verification requires the following settings:

Verification method .....Select "Auto increment".
Increment ....................Enter a value used to add to or subtract from the read code value.
No. of digits.................For the numerical verification, the acceptable number of digits is one to nine digits.
The following is the operation example when two digits are referenced and an increment of +2 is specified:
First reading
Reading + Verification
Read data
Preset value
+2
Preset value
98
Verication
98
Verication
Numerical value
+2
Verication
OK
Note
3-10
Verication
00
Verication
NG
00
Numerical value
+2
Verication
OK
The following restrictions are applied to the automatic increment verification function:
The verification results in NG when a value other than a numerical value is read.
This function assumes the first read data as a preset value. Consequently, the preset value cannot be
input through command communication.
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-5 Test Mode

This section describes the test mode of the SR-600 Series.
SR-600 Series Test Mode

The SR-600 Series provides the following six test modes.
Function
Scans a code ten times and measures the reading rate

according to the number of times that the code was read
correctly.
Online
Processing time test mode
Offline
This test mode measures the amount of time that it takes

to read a code and outputs the result.
Online
Position test mode
Offline
Measures a level indicating how far the code shifts from

the center of the field of view.
Burst reading test mode
Online
Reads a code in Burst reading mode and checks whether

the timing is correct.
For more information about the TEST button operations of the SR-600 Series or the multiple LED status display,
refer to "Activation using the button on the panel" (Page 3-4).
TIP
It is also possible to perform the test mode by specifying a parameter bank.

(
"Test mode control" (Page 7-12))
If no parameter banks have setting values, the test mode is performed for parameter bank 0 (bank for
read quick setup code).
Online and offline modes

Offline mode
Offline mode is used to determine whether the installation position and distance will be a problem before actually
installing the equipment.
The results from the beginning to the end of the test (through TEST command or TEST button operation) are
displayed in offline mode.
The test result data is output in real time.
Activate the test.
Stop the test.
Test operations
Testing
Testing
Online mode
After installing the SR-600 Series, online mode is used to determine if there are any problems with the installation
position or distance, the reading time, or other operations.
After switching to online mode, the test displays the results acquired from when the timing input is turned on until it
is turned off.
The test result data is output when the timing input turns off.
The online mode must be activated through the command input.
Activate the test.
Test commands
Stop the test.
Timing ON
Timing OFF
Timing operation
Testing
SR-600-M-NO3-E
Testing
3-11
Reading rate test mode
Description
Offline
3-5 Test Mode
Test Mode Measurement Status

The measurement status for the SR-600 Series test mode can be checked on the multiple LED indicator.
The multiple LED displays the following symbols during test mode.
Multiple LED
status
Reading rate
(%)
Processing time
(ms)
Code position
measurement
Burst
reading (ms)
OK/NG/ERROR
LED
90 to 100
UP to 99
LEVEL 5
Up to 199
Green
70 to 80
100 to 199
LEVEL 4
200 to 399
Green
50 to 60
200 to 299
LEVEL 3
400 to 599
Green
30 to 40
300 to 399
LEVEL 2
600 to 799
Green
10 to 20
400 or more
LEVEL 1
800 or more
Green
5 bars lit
4 bars lit
3 bars lit
2 bars lit
1 bar lit
0 bars lit
Reading error
3-12
Red
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-5 Test Mode
Test Mode Details

This section describes the advanced details of test mode.
The parameter bank switches while scanning, just as when reading with the alternate function. If reading is
successful, the parameter bank used for reading is fixed and the reading rate is calculated.
When a reading error occurs, the test mode switches to another parameter bank and continues the measurement.
Starting reading rate test mode

The following methods can be used to start reading rate test mode:
Operate the
button (press and hold for two seconds)
Quit: Press the
Send the TEST1 (#TEST1) command from the computer
Quit: Send the QUIT command (#QUIT) from the computer.
Assign "Start test mode" and "Reading rate test" to the IN terminals and turn on the input terminals.
Quit: Turn off the input terminal.
Reading rate mode output data

In reading rate test mode, data is sent to the computer in the following format after ten reading operations (operation
from trigger input to successful reading):
Offline mode
Read data
a = Parameter bank No. (0 to 16)

b = Reading rate
(1 to 100: Zero suppress)
d = Average brightness
(0 to 255: Average brightness value in code
region)
Online mode
Read data

b = Reading rate
(1 to 100: Zero suppress)
c = No. of decodes/No. of scans
(1 to 65535)
d = Average brightness
(0 to 255: Average brightness value in code
region)
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-13
This test mode scans a code ten times and measures the reading rate according to the number of times that the
code was read correctly.
3-5 Test Mode
TIP
When starting test mode, the data addition function is inactive.

When TEST1nn (#TEST1nn) (nn: Parameter bank No.) is sent, the reading rate test mode is run for
the bank with the specified parameter bank number.
Processing time test mode
This test mode measures the amount of time that it takes to read a code and outputs the result.
The parameter bank switches while scanning, just as when reading with the alternate function. If reading is successful,
the amount of time required from the start of reading until the completion of reading is measured and output. If the
decoding fails, the processing time becomes 0 ms.
Starting processing time test mode

The following methods can be used to start processing time test mode:
Operate the
button (press and hold for three seconds)
Quit: Press the
Send the TEST2 (#TEST2) command from the computer
Quit: Send the QUIT command (#QUIT) from the computer.
Assign "Start test mode" and "Processing time test" to the IN terminals and turn on the input terminals.
Processing time mode output data

In processing time test mode, data is sent to the computer in the following format after ten reading operations
(operation from trigger input to successful reading):
(The format is the same for offline and online modes.)
Read data
now = b ms
max = c ms
min = d ms

b = Latest reading time
c = Maximum reading time
(Longest time of the reading operation
from starting the processing time test
mode to outputting data)
d = Minimum reading time
(Shortest time of the reading operation
from starting the processing time test
mode to outputting data)
* The values for b, c, and d will be zerosuppressed.
TIP
3-14

When TEST2nn (#TEST2nn) (nn: Parameter bank No.) is sent, the processing time test mode is run
for the bank of the specified parameter bank No.
When the TEST2nn (#TEST2nn) command is sent or when there is only one parameter bank for
reading, the specified decode timeout period is ignored and reading is performed with a decode
timeout period of 2550 ms.
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-5 Test Mode
Position test mode

This test mode measures the level indicating how far the code shifts from the center of the field of view and can be
used to adjust both the code position and the SR-600 Series installation position.
Shifted position
The center of the code should be located at the

center of the field of view.
The code is shifted to a position far from the

center of the field of view.
3
Ideal position (LEVEL5)
Starting position test mode

The following methods can be used to start position test mode:
Operate the
button (press and hold for four seconds)
Quit: Press the
Send the TEST3 command from the computer
Quit: Send the QUIT command from the computer.
Assign "Start test mode" and "Position test" to the IN terminals and turn on the terminals.
Position mode output data

During code position test mode, data is sent to the computer in the following format after scanning:
Read data
level = b

b = Position level (0 to 5)
TIP
SR-600-M-NO3-E

The position test mode does not run in online mode.
When TEST3nn (nn: Parameter bank No.) is sent, the position test mode is run for the bank with the
specified parameter bank No.
3-15
3-5 Test Mode
Burst reading test mode

This test mode checks the reading stability by performing the burst reading operation.
This test uses a trigger input to perform burst reading. When the reading is successful, the burst No. of the
successful reading and the reading time required are output.
Starting burst reading test mode
Send the #TEST4 command from the computer.

Quit: Send the #QUIT command from the computer.
Burst reading test mode output data

During burst reading test mode, data is sent to the computer in the following format:
Read data
b ms
a = Burst No. (1 to 8)
b = Reading time
* The value of b will be zerosuppressed.
TIP
3-16

The burst reading test mode does not run in offline mode.
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-6 Multi-I/O Function

You can assign various operating conditions to the I/O terminals of the SR-600 Series. This section describes the
operations available with the Multi-I/O function.
Function and Operation of the Input Terminals (IN1 and IN2)

Functions assigned to the input terminals
3
Only one of the following functions can be assigned to each of the input terminals IN1 and IN2:
Trigger input: Use the terminal to start/stop reading 2D bar codes.
Register preset data: Use the terminal to register the preset data with the SR-600 Series.
Start test mode: Use the terminal to activate the specified test mode.
(This function cannot be used to start the online mode.)
Activate quick calibration: Use the terminal to activate the quick calibration function.
None: Select this option when the terminal is not used as an input terminal.
Use AutoID Navigator or the send setting command to change the setting or assign the desired function.
* By default, the functions are assigned as follows:
N1: Trigger input
N2: Register preset data
Input terminal status and operation

The table below shows the relationship between the status of the input terminal and the operation of the assigned
function.
Function assigned to the
input terminal
ON
OFF
Trigger input
Start reading.
Stop reading.
Start preset data registration.
Finish preset data registration.
Start test mode.
Activate the test mode.
Quit the test mode.
Activate quick calibration
Start quick calibration
Quit quick calibration
Synchronization with IN LED

Users can set the SR-600 Series to illuminate its IN LED when the IN1 or IN2 terminal turns on. When both IN1 and
IN2 terminals synchronize with the IN LED, the LED illuminates based on the OR condition of the terminal status.
(By default, only the IN1 terminal synchronizes with the LED.)
Input polarity setting

The polarity of the input terminal can be selected from "N.O. (normally open) contact" or "N.C. (normally closed)
contact".
(By default, "N.O. contact" is selected.)
The same input polarity is set for IN1 and IN2.
ON at power-on setting
Normally, the input terminal recognizes the change in the input signal (ON/OFF) after the SR-600 Series is turned on
and its operation stabilizes.
The input terminal does not operate if the input signal turns on before the operation stabilizes (approximately 2
seconds after power on).
If "ON at power-on" is enabled, the SR-600 Series recognizes the input ON status during the start-up period, and
after the operation stabilizes, it performs the operation specified for the input signal.
(By default, "ON at power-on" is disabled.)
Input time constant setting

Users can set the "Input time constant", which is the period required for the ON status of the input terminal to be
recognized. The function assigned to the input terminal is activated after the input stays on for the time specified
with "Input time constant" or longer.
(Input time constant setting range: Selectable from 1 ms, 2 ms or 10 ms; default setting is 1 ms.)
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-17
Function and Operation of the Output Terminals (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3,

and OUT4)
Functions assigned to the output terminals
The following functions can be assigned to the output terminals (OUT1 to OUT4). You can assign one or more
functions to each output terminal.
OK........................ This signal is output when a bar code is read successfully or when the comparison/verification
against preset data matches.
NG........................ This signal is output when the comparison/verification against the preset data does not match.
ERROR................. This signal is output when a read error occurs.
PRESET................ This signal is output when the preset data is registered successfully.
TUNING ............... This signal is output when the calibration is complete.
BUSY.................... This signal is output to notify the user that the SR-600 Series cannot read codes because it is
performing a specific operation. The BUSY signal has the following four variations according
to the current status or operation of the SR-600 Series:
TRG BUSY
: During the start-up period, trigger input, preset data registration, while the
laser pointer is on, or images are being saved to ROM.
USB BUSY
: During USB control mode
MODE BUSY : In setting mode, test mode, or during quick setup mode
ERR BUSY
: Error occurred (Buffer full, setting save error)
EXT.LIGHT............ This signal is output to control external illumination.
Note
3-18
The result output (OK, NG, ERROR, PRESET, TUNING), operation output (TRG BUSY, USB BUSY,
MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY), and EXT.LIGHT cannot be assigned to the same terminal.
EXT.LIGHT can be assigned to OUT4 only.
SR-600-M-NO3-E
Output terminal operation

The output terminals operate differently depending on the assigned function. There are three types of operations as
shown below:
OK, NG, ERROR, PRESET, and TUNING output
The above signals turn on the output for the specified output ON time when the respective event occurs.
ON
Event occurrence
OK/NG/ERROR
PRESET/TUNING
ON
Period of time set for output ON time
* For the above output functions, a higher priority is assigned to the output of the function which occurred last.
Consequently, when the next operation occurs during the output ON time of the previous operation, the signal is
switched to output the signal of the higher priority function.
Timing diagram (When OUT1 outputs an OK signal and then OUT2 outputs a NG signal)
ON
OUT1
(OK)
ON
OUT2
(NG)
Note
If the same operation occurs again within the period of the output ON time, the output turns off for 10 ms
and then turns on again to output the signal of the next operation. (If the same operation occurs
continuously at short intervals, the output turns on for at least 10 ms before it turns off and then turns on
again.)
Timing diagram (When OUT1 outputs signals continuously)

OUT1
(OK)
ON
10ms
10ms
10ms
Other than the example described above, the signal is switched when any of the following events occurs:
Change to Program/Test/Read quick setup mode
Laser pointer is turned on
Error
Buffer full
TRG BUSY, USB BUSY, MODE BUSY, and ERR BUSY output
The above signals are retained until the corresponding event ends.
(The period is not affected by the period of time set for the output ON time.)
Event occurrence
Event end
Event
occurrence
TRG BUSY/
USB BUSY/
MODE BUSY/
ERR BUSY
ON
* If all BUSY outputs are assigned to one output terminal, the output signal does not turn off until all events finish.
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-19
EXT.LIGHT (external illumination) output

The above signal is output in synchronization with the scan timing.
The output polarity can be selected from "N.O. (normally open) contact" or "N.C. (normally closed) contact".
The timing diagram shows the operation for the N.O. contact:
Input pulse width
Scan delay time
Trigger input
0.09 to 5 ms
Internal illumination
EXT.LIGHT output
Scanning
0.09 to 9.99 ms
Approx. 16 ms
Exposure time
Image capture time

Decode timeout
period
Decoding
Note
3-20
EXT.LIGHT can be assigned to OUT4 only.

When EXT.LIGHT is assigned to OUT4, no other output can be assigned to OUT4.
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-7 Quick Setup Code

This section describes the quick setup code.
Quick Setup Code
Note
When reading the quick setup code with the high-resolution type unit (SR-600HA), you must use a
printer with high print quality. When a printer with low print quality is used, the cells in the 2D code may
bleed and become unreadable. Be sure to use a printer with 300 dpi or more for printing.
Reading the quick setup code

Use the following steps to read the quick setup code:
1
2
3
Press and hold the

button on the SR-600 Series for at least four seconds.
The operation begins and letters "C" and "0" are displayed alternately in the
multiple LED indicator.
Read the quick setup code.

The number of quick setup codes being read and "C" are displayed
alternately.
When all quick setup codes are read, the lighting emission stops and the
multiple LED indicator shows "d".
Press the
Note
SR-600-M-NO3-E
button quickly to end the operation.

During reading mode for the quick setup code, reading a code other than the quick
setup code causes "F" to appear on the multiple LED indicator and stops the
operation.
To configure the settings with the quick setup code, you need to read all quick setup
codes. If the reading is interrupted mid-process, the settings are not changed.
The preset data is not included in the quick setup code.
Either read the preset data or send it through AutoID Navigator.
3-21
3
Users can print the settings specified with AutoID Navigator as a bar code, and read the code with the SR-600
Series to change all the settings at once. When printing the quick setup code, use the AutoID Navigator quick setup
code printing function.
Since the settings of the SR-600 Series can be changed by just reading the code, you can change the settings even
in a location where a computer cannot be used.
3-8 Preventive Maintenance Information (PMI)

Preventive Maintenance Information (PMI) detects factors that reduce reading stability, such as the changes in code
marking quality or dirt on the scanner. This information can be used as diagnostic information to prevent serious
problems.
PMI assessment criteria
3
PMI is judged on the difference between the brightness during the scanning parameter calibration and the
brightness during actual reading.
The PMI assessment criteria is set as follows:
PMI=2
PMI=1
L1
PMI
PMI=0
L2
PMI=1
L3
PMI=2
L4
Calculation formula
Assessment
L2 Reading brightness / Calibration brightness L3
Normal
L1 Reading brightness / Calibration brightness < L2

L3 < Reading brightness / Calibration brightness L4
CAUTION
Reading brightness / Calibration brightness < L1

L4 < Reading brightness / Calibration brightness
WARNING
Reading error
*L1 to L4 = 001 to 100 (Set in units of 1)
How to determine the assessment criteria

Use the following method to acquire the brightness information used for determining the PMI assessment criteria:
Calibration brightness
Use the brightness value set in the scan settings.
When the quick calibration function is used, the brightness value can be obtained by reading the settings of the SR600 Series with the AutoID Navigator.
Reading brightness
The brightness during reading can be checked by running the reading rate test mode. Use the AutoID Navigator to
run the reading rate test mode and check the result.
Calculation of the assessment criteria value

Calculate the brightness values obtained above as follows to determine the assessment criteria value:
Assessment criteria value = (Reading brightness / Calibration brightness) x 10
* The preventive maintenance setting can be set between 0 and 100.
When the reading brightness is the same as the calibration brightness, the assessment criteria is 10.
Configuring the preventive maintenance setting

Configure the preventive maintenance setting based on the calculated assessment criteria.
The preventive maintenance setting can be configured in four levels: L1 to L4.
Be sure to set L1 < L2 < L3 < L4.
Note
3-22
PMI is 0 when the quick calibration is not performed or when the scan parameter settings are not
configured.
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-9 Image Saving Function

This section describes the image saving function of the SR-600 Series.
Image Saving Function
You can use the AutoID Navigator to select either RAM or ROM as the destination to save the images.
Saving into RAM

When saving into RAM is selected, the scanned data for all parameter bank numbers being used is saved in the
RAM.
The saved image data will be cleared when the power supply is stopped or when the connection is established in
USB control mode.
During burst reading, all burst scan images are saved as the most recent images.
Example:
When the parameter banks are switched in the order of No. 1, 2, and 3 and decoding
succeeds for parameter bank No. 3, the image of each parameter bank is saved as follows:
Parameter bank No. 1: NG image 1
Parameter bank No. 2: NG image 2
Parameter bank No. 3: Most recent image
Saving into ROM

When saving into ROM is selected, the scanned data for all parameter bank numbers being used is saved in the
ROM when reading fails.
During burst reading, the scanned data for the specified burst scan number is saved in the ROM.
The saving into ROM function does not save the most recent image.
When an image is being saved into the ROM, the TRG BUSY output turns on and the next scan is disabled.
The saving time is approximately 5 to 36 seconds depending on the number of images to be saved.
The saved image data is retained even when the power supply is stopped.
SR-600-M-NO3-E
3-23
3
This function saves the latest images obtained for individual parameter banks into the memory of the SR-600 Series
and verifies them with the AutoID Navigator.
A maximum of 17 images can be saved: One for each parameter bank plus the most recent image.
To view the saved image, use the "View image" function of the AutoID Navigator. (
"Image Retrieval" (Page 5-48))
3-9 Image Saving Function
MEMO
3
3-24
SR-600-M-NO3-E
4
4
Operation of the SR-600

Series
This section describes the reading conditions of the SR-600 Series.
4-1
4-2
SR-600-M-NO4-E
Reading Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Reading Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-1
4-1 Reading Operations

This section describes the reading conditions and measuring methods of the SR-600 Series.
Reading Operation Process

This section describes the steps of the reading operation in detail.
Scanning and decoding
4
Operation of the SR-600 Series
After scanning an image, the SR-600 Series recognizes a code and decodes it.
The SR-600 Series achieves high speed reading ability by processing the image before decoding.
Scanning
The SR-600 Series illuminates the target to scan the image.
The scanning requires the following settings:
Exposure time
Specify the time to scan the image.
The longer the exposure time is set, the longer the
illumination is applied, resulting in brighter scanned data.
The shorter the exposure time is set, the shorter the
illumination is applied, resulting in darker scanned data.
TIP
The maximum exposure time is 9.99 ms.
Short
Long
Exposure time
Internal lighting and external lighting

The SR-600 Series incorporates an internal lighting mechanism.
You can select whether to use the built-in internal light or your own external lighting for scanning.
To use external lighting, assign the EXT.LIGHT output to the OUT4 terminal to output the timing signal to turn on the
lighting.
"Function and Operation of the Output Terminals (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4)" (Page 3-18)
Note
The maximum time that the internal light can be pulsed on is 5 ms.
The maximum time that the external light can be pulsed on is 9.99 ms.
Obtaining data
After the exposure time elapses, the SR-600 Series obtains the scanned data. The time required to obtain the data is
approximately 16 ms.
4-2
SR-600-M-NO4-E
Decoding operation
Before decoding, the SR-600 Series processes the scanned data in several steps.
This section describes these processes.
Relationship between the image sample and light quantity waveform

Light
quantity
4
The image sample shows the image data scanned

and processed with the SR-600.
The light quantity waveform shows the quantity of
light (brightness) at every point along the
horizontal line on the image sample.
The greater the change in the light quantity
(contrast), the higher the reading stability
becomes.
Decoding operation steps

Description
Image sample
Light quantity waveform
Obtaining the scanned data

The data scanned in the specified exposure time is
obtained.
Sensitivity
The sensitivity when the data was scanned is set.
Digitization (A/D conversion)

The scanned data is digitized.
This digitization does not require any internal user settings.
Gain
The scanned data is digitally amplified.
Dynamic range
The dynamic range of the obtained image is set.
The selectable range is "Hi-Sensitive", "Hi-SNR" (High S/N
ratio), and "Hi-DR" (High dynamic range).
Dynamic range
HiDR
Hi-SNR
Hi-Sensitive
SR-600-M-NO4-E
4-3
Description
Image sample
Light quantity waveform
Decoding range specification

The range used for decoding is specified.
Limiting the range reduces the time required for decoding.
Filtering
An image filter is applied to the scanned data.
The filter can be selected from the expand filter, shrink
filter, or a combination thereof.
You can, for example, expand dot printing to make reading
easier.
Decoding
The SR-600 Series searches for a code and analyzes it.
The higher the contrast between the background and cells
(for a bar code, between the bars and spaces), the more
stable reading is ensured.
TIP
For images to be saved or observed in the live view, they must complete up to step 7.
Alternate Function
This section describes the operation of the alternate function.
The alternate function performs scanning and decoding alternately.
For the operation of a specific parameter number, the number of scans/decodes is set with "Repeat read attempts",
and the timeout period for decoding is set with "Decode timeout".
If decoding fails even after scanning is repeated by the No. of in-bank retries, the bank is switched (alternated) to
the next bank.
"3-3 Alternate Function"
Timing diagram
* When parameter bank No. 1 and 2 are used
Trigger input
Scanning
Parameter
bank No. 1
Decoding
Decode timeout
Repeat read
attempts (n times)
0 times
1 time
n times
Scanning
Parameter
bank No. 2
Decoding
Decode timeout
Repeat read
attempts (m times)
4-4
0 times
m times
SR-600-M-NO4-E
Trigger Type
The SR-600 Series offers two trigger types: "Level trigger" and "One-shot trigger".
Normally, the "Level trigger" is used. Select the appropriate method according to your application.
This section describes an example using the following settings:
"Single Reading Mode" (Page 4-10))
Reading mode
: "Single read mode" (
Data-send timing
: "At reading end" (
"At reading end" (Page 4-7))
Output terminal settings: OUT1 = OK

OUT2 = NG + ERROR
OUT3 = ERROR
OUT4 = TRG BUSY
The following description refers to these outputs as OK, NG, ERROR, and TRGBUSY
respectively.
"3-6 Multi-I/O Function"
Note
The SR-600 Series does not accept trigger inputs for approximately 2 seconds after the power is turned
on.
During this period, the multiple LED indicator turns on all LEDs.
Be sure to turn on the trigger input after sufficient time has passed since the power was turned on.
When "Output BUSY upon power-up" is set to "On", the TRG BUSY output turns on for 500 ms after
power-up.
Level trigger
When the trigger input turns on, the SR-600 Series turns on the illumination to start scanning.
When a code is read successfully, it stops illumination and sends the data.
If the SR-600 Series fails to read a code, it stops illumination when the trigger input turns off and sends a reading
error.
Timing diagram
<When reading is successful>
<When reading failed>
Trigger input
Code
Scanning + Decoding
Data communication
OK/NG/ERR LED output
OK/NG
ERROR
TRGBUSY output
Set the trigger input so that it stays on long enough for the target code to be entirely illuminated.
The illumination of the SR-600 Series turns on after the trigger input has been activated for the specified input
time constant.
The data communication time can be obtained using the following equation:
Data communication time =
Data length + (1: When parity is used) + Start/stop bits
Baud rate
(No. of digits of data to be sent + No. of characters of

header and terminator)
The ON time for the OK/NG/ERROR output can be set within the range of 10 to 2550 ms (Default: 500 ms).
SR-600-M-NO4-E
4-5
Note
TIP
When a code is read at an interval shorter than the specified output ON time, the OK/NG/ERROR output
turns off even if the output ON time of the previous output signal has not elapsed, and a new output
signal turns on for the specified output ON time. If output terminal operations of the same type occur
successively (such as OK to OK), the previous output signal turns off for 5 ms, and then the new output
signal turns on.
Refer to "Function and Operation of the Output Terminals (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4)" (Page
3-18)
The TRGBUSY output turns on from the time the trigger input turns on to the time code reading is
complete or the trigger input is turned off.
One-shot trigger
When the SR-600 Series detects that the trigger input is on, it turns on the lighting for the specified one-shot trigger
duration to scan a code.
When a code is read successfully, it stops illumination and sends the data. The other operations are the same as
those for the level trigger.
Use the one-shot trigger if the ON time of the trigger input is extremely short or if you want to fix the reading time.
Timing diagram
Trigger input
Code
One-shot trigger duration
Scanning + Decoding
Data communication
OK/NG
ERROR
TRGBUSY output
When the trigger input stays on for the specified input time constant, the illumination of the SR-600 Series turns on
and the scanning begins. When the reading is complete, the illumination stops.
The input time constant for the trigger input can be changed to 1 ms, 2 ms, or 10 ms.
The one-shot trigger duration can be changed within the range of 10 to 25500 ms.
If the SR-600 Series fails to read a code within the one-shot trigger duration, it stops illumination and outputs a
reading error.
The other operations and precautions are the same as those for the level trigger.
Note
The ON state of the trigger input is recognized after the input stays on for at least the specified input time
constant.
The OFF state of the trigger input is recognized after the input stays off for at least the specified input
time constant. Consequently, when the line speed is fast and fast pulse signals are used as trigger input
signals, be careful to make the ON/OFF time of the pulse signals longer than the specified input time
constant.
a
Trigger input
When a > b (where "a" is the input time constant for the trigger input), the OFF state of the trigger input is
not recognized.
When a b, the ON/OFF state of the timing signal can be recognized.
4-6
SR-600-M-NO4-E
Shutter delay
The SR-600 Series allows the setting of the "Shutter Delay" to delay the timing to start scanning.
By setting the shutter delay, you can synchronize the input from the sensor with the entry timing of the target when
they are out of sync.
The time can be set between 0 and 255 ms in increments of 1 ms (Default: 0 ms).
Timing diagram
Input time constant
Scan delay time
Trigger input
0.09 to 5 ms
Internal light
EXT.LIGHT output
Scanning
0.09 to 9.99 ms
Approx. 16 ms
Exposure time
Image capture time

Decode timeout
Decoding
Data Transmission Timing

The SR-600 Series offers the following two types of timing for sending the read data and OK/NG/ERROR output:
At reading end
At trigger end
Select the appropriate type for your application. Normally, "At reading end" is used.
At reading end
The SR-600 Series outputs read data and an OK/NG signal as soon as it completes reading a code. If the SR-600
Series fails reading a code, it outputs a reading error code and an ERROR signal at the point when the timing signal
turns off. The timing diagrams are the same as those shown in "Trigger type".
SR-600-M-NO4-E
4-7
At trigger end
When "At trigger end" is selected, the SR-600 Series outputs read data and an OK/NG/ERROR signal at the next
timing point for the specified trigger type. Use this type to output data and output signals with the same timing.
Timing diagram for the level trigger

When the trigger input turns off, the read data and OK/NG/ERROR signal are output.
Trigger input
Code
Scanning + Decoding
Data communication
OK/NG
ERROR
TRGBUSY output
When a code is read successfully, the reading stops.

The TRGBUSY output continues until the trigger input turns off.
Timing diagram for the one-shot trigger

When the specified one-shot trigger duration elapses, the read data and OK/NG/ERROR signal are output.
Trigger input
Code
Scanning + Decoding
Data communication
OK/NG
ERROR
TRGBUSY output
When a code is read successfully, the reading stops.

The TRGBUSY output continues until the one-shot trigger duration elapses.
4-8
SR-600-M-NO4-E
When Connected via USB

This section describes the operation when the AutoID Navigator obtains images in real time through the USB
connection.
Real-time images can be obtained when the USB connection is established and either of the following functions is
used:
Live view
Automatic tuning
[Monitor] on the Automatic tuning screen
4
The timing diagram below is an example with the following settings:

Data transmission: At reading end
Level trigger
Timing diagram
Both data communication and image output through USB communication are performed.
In USB control mode, images are output after the data communication.
The reading time for obtaining images through the USB connection is longer.
Reading time
Trigger input
Scanning
Decoding
Data communication
USB communication
OK/
NG
TRGBUSY output
SR-600-M-NO4-E
4-9
4-2 Reading Mode

The SR-600 Series offers four types of reading modes. Select the appropriate type for your application. For most
applications, use "Single reading mode".
Single Reading Mode

In this mode, the SR-600 Series reads a single code while the trigger input is turned on, and then outputs the data.
Timing diagram
Trigger input
Code
Scanning + Decoding
Data communication
OK/NG
ERROR
TRGBUSY output
* The above timing diagram shows the case where "Level trigger" and "At reading end" are selected.
In Single reading mode, the data transmission timing can be selected from "at reading end" or "at trigger end".
The trigger type can be selected from "Level trigger" or "One-shot trigger".
Reading multiple codes in Single reading mode

Normally, the Single read mode is used to read a single 2D code or bar code per trigger input. However, setting the
following reading parameters allows the mode to read multiple codes with one trigger input:
When "Multiple read" is selected in the code detail settings

When "Multiple read" is selected in the code detail settings, the specified number of codes can be read during one
reading operation as long as the codes are of the same type.
For setup, use either the code settings of the AutoID Navigator or the setting command.
The number of codes for multiple readings can be set between 2 and 4.
When "Allow fewer detection" is selected, the reading is considered successful if at least one code is read
successfully.
Note
This setting cannot read multiple codes of different types in one reading operation.
For the code output order, the code with the center coordinates closest to the top of the scan screen is
output first and when there are several codes at the same height, the one closest to the left side is
first.
The following output data format is used when "Multi read" is selected:
Header
1st data
2nd data
Terminator
,= Intermediate delimiter (The setting can be changed.)

(Default: Comma [2C]. Can be set using 5 characters or less.)
4-10
SR-600-M-NO4-E
4-2 Reading Mode
Reading Conjugated QR codes

When "Structured append mode" has been set and a QR code with joined QR information is read, the reading
continues until all of the conjugated QR codes are read.
The following output data format is used when the conjugated QR code reading is set:
Header
Important
1st data
2nd data
Terminator
When conjugated QR code reading is set, "Multi read" cannot be used.
When composite characters (CC-A, CC-B, CC-C) are read

When CC-A, CC-B, or CC-C is selected for the type of code, composite characters can be read.
"Code" (Page 5-19)
The following output data format is used when a composite character (CC-A, CC-B, CC-C) is read:
Header
Bar code data
2D code data
Terminator
a: Composite delimiter (The setting can be changed.)

(Default: No setting. Can be set using 5 characters or less.)
Note
"Multi read" cannot be used for composite characters.

Verification will be performed for the data which does not include a composite delimiter.
Continuous Reading Mode

In this mode, the SR-600 Series reads multiple codes in succession while the trigger input is turned on once.
In continuous reading mode, the laser-aim beam is emitted for the specified laser-aim blinking duration every time a
code is scanned.
Scanning is not performed while the laser beam is being emitted.
In Continuous reading mode, the SR-600 Series sends out data every time it reads one code and outputs an OK
signal (or an OK/NG signal when preset data is registered). If no data is read while the trigger input is turned on, a
reading error code and an ERROR signal are output after the trigger input turns off.
Repeat-reading
prevention time
Trigger input
Code
Scanning + Decoding
Data communication
OK
/
NG
OK
/
NG
OK
/
NG
OK
/
NG
ERROR
TRGBUSY output
The SR-600 Series reads codes in succession during the following periods:
Level trigger
: While the trigger input is turned on
One-shot trigger
: During the specified one-shot trigger duration
The repeat-reading prevention time is required to prevent the same code from being read twice. When codes with
the same contents are read in succession, adjust the moving speed so that the codes pass at intervals longer
than the specified repeat-reading prevention time (Setting range: 100 to 25500 ms). Codes with different contents
can be read at shorter intervals.
Note
SR-600-M-NO4-E
In the continuous reading mode, the decode timeout will be set to the maximum value (2550 ms).
4-11
4-2 Reading Mode
Bank Collection Reading Mode

The Bank collection reading mode is used to read the codes in the parameter banks with registered settings when a
trigger input is turned on once.
In Bank collection reading mode, the laser-aim beam is emitted for the specified laser-aim blinking duration every
time a code is scanned.
When all codes (16 types max.) in the parameter banks are read, the read data is sent in the order of parameter
bank No. 1 to 16 at the point when the timing signal turns off, and an OK/NG signal is output.
If no code was read while the trigger input was turned on or if at least one code of a parameter bank was not read,
the SR-600 Series sends a reading error and outputs an ERROR signal for the unread code after the trigger input
turns off.
4
Timing diagram when parameter banks 1, 2 and 4 have registered settings

<When reading failed for bank 2>

Reading error
Trigger input
Parameter bank No.
(1) (2) (4)
Scanning + Decoding
(1) (2) (4) (2) (2)

Reading success
Data communication
OK/
NG
ERROR
TRGBUSY output
The SR-600 Series reads codes in succession during the following periods.
Level trigger: While a trigger input is turned on
One-shot trigger duration: During the specified one-shot trigger duration
An OK signal is output when the codes in all the parameter banks with registered settings were read.
An ERROR signal is output when at least one specified code could not be read.
Even when there are several codes within the reading range, all codes can be read simultaneously.
Note
In the bank collection reading mode, the decode timeout will be set to the maximum value (2550 ms).
Output data format

The following output data format is used for the read data.
Header
Read data in
parameter bank
No. 1
Read data in
parameter bank
No. 2
......
Read data in
parameter bank
No. 16
Terminator
Each read data is separated with "," (2Ch: Intermediate delimiter).

The data for the read bar codes is saved in the send buffer of the SR-600 Series once and then is output when the
trigger input turns off. The size of the send buffer of the SR-600 Series is 10 KB.
If reading fails for any of parameter banks 1 to 16 or if the specified code is not found, a reading error code is sent
as the read data of the corresponding parameter bank number.
4-12
SR-600-M-NO4-E
4-2 Reading Mode
Burst Reading Mode

The burst reading mode is a function to repeat scan up to a maximum of 8 times in succession and perform
decoding after the scanning is complete.
When, for example, the line speed is fast and accurate positioning is difficult, this function ensures scanning without
missing codes by repeating scans only for the period during which the target is expected to pass.
Note
The alternate function cannot be used in Burst reading mode.

Decoding is performed for the specified parameter bank No. setting.
In Burst reading mode, the No. of repeat read attempts setting is ignored.
Timing diagram
The following is the timing diagram when the Burst reading mode is used.
No. of burst scans
Trigger input
Scanning
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Burst scan interval
(1) (2) (3)
Decoding
(1) (2) (3)

Burst scan No.
Data communication
OK/NG
ERROR
TRGBUSY output
In Burst reading mode, the scanned data is decoded in the order in which it was obtained.
If decoding fails after the decode timeout period elapses, the decoding is shifted to the next scanned data.
The decoding time when decoding succeeds for the third scanned data is as follows:
Decoding
failed
Decoding Decoding
failed
succeeded
Burst scan Burst scan Burst scan

No.
No.
No.
Decoding
(1)
(2)
(3)
Decode
timeout
Decoding time
SR-600-M-NO4-E
4-13
4-2 Reading Mode
MEMO
4
4-14
SR-600-M-NO4-E
5
5
AutoID Navigator
Functions and Operation
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
SR-600-M-NO5-E
Installing, Starting, and Shutting Down. . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Using AutoID Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Configuration Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Sending/Receiving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Saving/Reading a Setting File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Quick Setup Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Terminal and Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Live View and Load Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5-1
5-1 Installing, Starting, and Shutting Down

This section describes how to install the AutoID Navigator as well as how to start and shut down the application.
PC Requirements
Before starting installation, confirm that your PC meets the following requirements.
Requirements
Verify that the system meets the following requirements as they are necessary to install and use the AutoID
Navigator software.
Description
5
AutoID Navigator Functions and Operation
OS
Windows 8 (excluding Windows RT)

Windows 7 (32bit/64bit)
Windows Vista (32bit)
Windows XP (32bit)
DVD-ROM Drive
Required for installation
Port/connector
D-Sub 9-pin RS-232C port or USB port
Other
.NET Framework 3.5 SP1 or later must be installed in advance.
Installation Procedure
This section explains how to install the AutoID Navigator using the following drive configuration under Windows XP
as an example:
Drive C: Hard disk drive
Drive E: DVD-ROM drive
Important
To install the USB driver, log on as a user with proper rights to change the system configuration, such
as Administrator or Computer Administrator.
Before starting installation, quit any other applications that are running. The installation may take
longer if antivirus software or other applications are active on the computer.
Insert the "AutoID Navigator Master Disk" into the DVD-ROM drive of the PC.
Use Windows Explorer or another file management program to access the DVD-ROM drive and then double
click "Setup_EN.exe" in the root folder.
[Welcome to the AutoID Navigator (en) Setup Wizard] is
displayed.
5-2
SR-600-M-NO5-E
Click the Next button.

The [Select Installation Folder] window appears.
Click on the [Browse] button to change to the folder in
which the application will be installed.
5

The [Confirm Installation] window appears.

When the [Installation Complete] window appears, click
the [Close] button.
The AutoID Navigator installation is now complete.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-3
Startup Procedure
Start AutoID Navigator.
From the Start menu, select [Programs][KEYENCE Applications][AutoID Navigator]. Or, double-click the
icon on the desktop.
The AutoID Navigator will start up.
5
Connection Update between AutoID Navigator and the SR-600 Series

The connection to the SR-600 Series must be confirmed before settings can be sent.
Click the
menu icon.
Begins communication with the connected SR-600 Series. "Connecting..." will be displayed.
When the connection is established

successfully, [Connection success] is
displayed. Otherwise, [Connection failure]
is displayed. When an incorrect model
was selected, [Connection is different] is
displayed.
5-4
SR-600-M-NO5-E
When the USB connection is used, the following message appears:

To establish the connection in the USB control mode, click [Yes]. Otherwise, click [No].
In the USB control mode, all communication is handled with USB communication. When the USB control mode is not
selected, the USB communication is used only for image display, such as Live view.
The following will be displayed once the connection has been established:
will be displayed on the "System configuration" display.
In the USB control mode, the icon indicating the established connection shows "USB".
Shutdown Procedure
Shutdown AutoID Navigator.
Click the
button on the right side of the title bar. Or, press the
and
keys.
The AutoID Navigator will shut down.
Display of the icon during connection updates
: No connection has been established.

: The connection has been established successfully to the device hanging from the N-L1, N-410, or NX-50 Series.
: The attempt to connect to the device hanging from the N-L1, N-410, or NX-50 Series failed.
: The model of the device hanging from the N-L1, N-410, or NX-50 Series is different.
: The connection has been established successfully to the device registered immediately under "DefaultProject".
: The attempt to connect to the device registered immediately under "DefaultProject" failed.
: The model of the device registered immediately under "DefaultProject" is different.
: The SR-600 Series is connected in USB control mode.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-5
The
and
buttons become active.
An icon appears to indicate the established connection.
5-2 Screen Layout

This section describes the icons for AutoID Navigator.
Project Configuration
The AutoID Navigator manages devices in a "project".
To register a device with a project, double-click the icon of the model or drag it to the registering location.
5
The project display can be selected from [System configuration] and [File configuration].
"System configuration" and "File configuration" can be toggled as follows:
Click
and select the desired configuration from the list.
Menu icons
Icon
5-6
Name
Function
New project
Create a new project.
Open a project file
Open a saved project file.

Extension: .ain
Save a project file
Save the setting changes for the project file.

Extension: .ain
Options
Sets the communication conditions for the computer (serial/

Ethernet).
Update connection
Reconnects the SR-600 Series to the AutoID Navigator.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-2 Screen Layout
System configuration
Displays the system configuration information.
5
File configuration
Displays the system configuration files for the project and the setting files for each device.
Select a device from Parameter and then set the read parameters for that device.
Click the [Print] button to print the selected file.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-7
5-2 Screen Layout
Device Operation Settings

Use the AutoID Navigator to set the parameters or to check the operation of the SR-600 Series.
To begin, select the SR-600 Series in the project configuration.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) (6)
(7)
(8) (9)
(1)
5
(1)
Detailed settings
To change the settings, click the [Config] button.
There are tabs for different setting categories. Clicking the tab shows the corresponding setting screen.
(2)
Terminal
Start the terminal screen.
This screen allows you to check the data read with the SR-600 Series on the screen or to send/receive
commands.
5-8
(3)
Test mode
Activate the test mode to check reading rate or reading time.
(4)
View image
View the images stored in the SR-600 Series on the screen.
(5)
Live view
Show the image being scanned with the SR-600 Series in real time.
(6)
Image setting
Set the display form and quality of the image here.
(7)
Open settings files, save settings, and print setup codes

Save or read the settings, or print them as a quick setup code.
(8)
Sending/receiving settings
Send/receive the settings between the AutoID Navigator and the SR-600 Series being connected.
(9)
Connection
When USB connection is established, the USB logo is displayed in green.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-3 Using AutoID Navigator

The basic operation flow of AutoID Navigator is as follows:
Select SR-600 from the model list
Set the operation of the SR-600 Series

Page 5-10
Send the settings to the SR-600 Series

Page 5-35
Perform a reading test

Page 5-44
Save/print the settings as necessary

Page 5-37
Shut down AutoID Navigator
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-9
5-4 Configuration Settings

This section describes the setting items of the SR-600 Series which can be set with the AutoID Navigator.
To begin, click the [Config] button of the AutoID Navigator to display the setting screen.
Camera
Set the parameters used for reading.
The reading parameters are saved in the parameter banks individually.
The SR-600 Series has 16 parameter banks.
For operation details and process flow, refer to
"4-1 Reading Operations".
(3)
5
(2)
(1)
(4)
(1)
Copy/Swap the setting

Use these buttons to copy or swap the settings between the parameter banks.
(2)
Parameter bank setting information

The current settings of the parameter banks are displayed.
(3)
Manual/Auto/BankTest
Use these buttons to activate the automatic setting, manual setting, or test mode for each parameter bank.
Auto
(4)
5-10
: Use the quick tuning function to perform tuning by reading an actual code.
Manual
: Modify the setting items of the parameter banks directly.
BankTest
: Test the reading stability by using the specified parameter settings.
Show detail
Check this option to display all items for the parameter bank setting.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
Parameter bank setting information

This section describes the setting items of the parameter bank in detail.
Alternate
Set whether to use the alternate function.
When alternate is set to [No], the corresponding parameter bank will not be used for reading.
Code
Set the code type to be read. Set one code for each bank.
Up to eight different code types can be registered.
Camera setup
Set the options to scan an image.

Exposure...........................Set the time of exposure to scan an image.
Default
: 300 s
Setting range : 90 to 9990 s
Important
When the internal lighting is used, the maximum exposure time will be 5000 s.
Internal lighting ................Select whether to use or not use the built-in LED lighting.
When [Disable] is selected, the internal lighting of the SR-600 Series does not illuminate during scanning.
Default
: Enable
Setting range : Enable or Disable

External lighting ............... Select whether to use or not use external lighting.
To use EXT.LIGHT for the output setting of OUT4, select [Enable].
Default
: Disable

Shutter delay ....................Set the delay between the recognition of a trigger input and the scanning start.
Use this option when the actual scanning should occur later than the timing indicated by the trigger input sensor.
Default
: 0 ms
Setting range : 0 to 255 ms

Brightness ........................Set to record the average brightness of the code region during scanning.
The recorded value is used for the preventive maintenance information (PMI) function. The value is automatically
obtained during automatic tuning.
Default
: 0
Setting range : 0 to 255
Read settings
Set the illumination, reversing/flipping of scanned images, and other options.
For details and flow of read operation, refer to "Decoding operation (Page 4-3)".
Sensitivity .........................Set the analog amplification factor for the brightness of the scanned data.
This function amplifies the brightness of the scanned data.
Initially, the brightness of the code is amplified with analog processing to create a readable image.
Default
: 1.000x
Setting range : 1.000x to 4.000x

Gain ...................................Set the digital amplification factor for the brightness of the scanned data.
This function digitally amplifies the brightness after the code has undergone analog to digital conversion.
Default
: 1.00x
Setting range : 0.25 to 3.75x
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-11
Dynamic range .................Set the dynamic range of the light-receiving condition.

This function sets the dynamic range of the scanned data.
Select from Hi-Sensitive, Hi-SNR or Hi-DR (High dynamic range).
Default
: Hi-Sensitive
Setting range : Hi-Sensitive, Hi-SNR, or Hi-DR

Offset.................................Set the offset value for the scanned data.
This function sets the offset value for the scanned data.
When the offset is used, the gain processing will be performed after the brightness of the scanned data is offset.
When [Default] is checked, the factory-set offset value will be used.
This should not normally be changed from the default value.
Digital filter .......................Set whether to apply filters to the image before decoding.
This function sets whether to apply filters to the scanned image.
Select from the expand filter, shrink filter, or a combination thereof.
Default
Raw
Setting range : Expand-low, Expand-mid, Expand-high

Expand-low & Shrink, Expand-mid & Shrink, Expand-high & Shrink
Shrink-low, Shrink-mid, Shrink-high
Shrink-low & Expand, Shrink-mid & Expand, Shrink-high & Expand
TIP
The expand filter expands black pixels to remove white pixel noise.
The shrink filter contracts black pixels to correct a thickened line for printing.
Negative ............................Set whether to read white-on-black reversed codes.

Default
: Disable

Mirror.................................Set whether to read right-left flipped codes.
Default
: Disable
5-12
SR-600-M-NO5-E
ROI.....................................Specify the range used for decoding.

Specifying a narrower range makes the processing time shorter.
Default
Definition of coordinates
: Left - 0 Right - 751

Top - 0 Bottom - 479
Setting range : X-axis 0 to 751

(Left: even, Right: odd)
X
(0, 0)
Y-axis 0 to 479
* The specified range must be greater than 100
(751, 479)
for both X and Y axes.
Decode setting
Set the detailed decode processing for each code. Click the [Advance] button to display these options.
Algorithm
Specify the algorithm used for reading.
Code Setup
: This option is selectable for QR or DataMatrix.
Default
: Normal mode
Setting range : Rapid mode, Normal mode, Quality mode
TIP
[Rapid mode] can be selected for DataMatrix only.
Allow clumsy cell

Select whether to read codes whose cells do not have a rectangular shape.
Code Setup
: This option is selectable for QR or DataMatrix.
Default
: Disabled
Allow low contrast

Select whether to apply image processing to enable reading of low contrast codes.
Code Setup : This option is selectable for all 2D codes and bar codes.
Default
: Disabled
Allow poor alignment

Select whether to allow reading of a large code even when its position is misaligned.
Code Setup
: This option is selectable for DataMatrix.
Default
: Disabled
Decode timeout
This specifies the maximum decode time. If decoding does not finish within this period, the next scan is performed.
Default
: 100 ms
Setting range : 1 to 255x10 ms
Repeat read attempts

Set the number of scanning/decoding operations repeated for a specific parameter bank before using the alternate
function.
Default
: 0 times
Setting range : 0 to 32 times
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-13
Automatic tuning
Click the
icon to display the automatic tuning screen.
On this screen, you can perform tuning according to the specified conditions and then save the result for a specific
parameter bank.
(7)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(6)
(1)
Positioning
These tools are used for positioning to perform tuning.
Monitor
: Display the moving image of the current scanning operation on the monitor screen.
AUTO button : When this button is on, the screen brightness is automatically adjusted to an optimum
value for the monitor screen display.
Laser aiming : Activate the laser pointer of the SR-600 Series.
(2)
Tuning
Start/Stop
: Start or stop the tuning.
Tuning policy setup: Open the tuning policy setup screen.
(3)
Monitor screen
When the USB connection is established, this screen shows the image for positioning or the image during
tuning. The image can be enlarged by double-clicking.
(4)
Tuning waveform
When the tuning is performed, the result of decoding is plotted for every scan.
In this graph, the horizontal axis shows the brightness of the scanned data, and the vertical axis shows the
decode time (green) and reading quality (red).
When the tuning finishes, the optimum reading conditions are displayed/selected in light blue.
You can adjust the setting values by dragging the waveform.
(5)
Message window
The progress of the tuning or a message about the result is shown here.
(6)
Tuning history
The latest five tuning events are displayed as history.
Update
Clear
(7)
: Apply the contents of the selected history data as the setting values of the selected
parameter bank.
: Clear all history data.
Save in ROM
Select whether to save the result into the ROM of the SR-600 Series when the tuning finishes. When this option
is not checked, you need to write the tuning result by using [Send settings].
5-14
SR-600-M-NO5-E
Tuning policy setup

Click the Tuning policy setup icon on the Automatic tuning screen to open the tuning policy setup window.
In this window, you can set various tuning options according to the actual reading target and reading environment.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
Tuning algorithm
Select the algorithm used for the tuning.
for Labels
: This option is used for most applications.
for Moving target : Select this option to read a code on a moving object.
for DPM target
: Select this option to read a dot printed code.
(2)
Tabs for detailed settings

Used to set the detailed tuning options. The items displayed on each tab vary depending on the selected
tuning algorithm.
Camera settings
Set the options related to scanning.
Exposure
Select whether to use a specific exposure time or to use the time automatically determined from the tuning result.
When selecting [Specific], specify the exposure time. This option is displayed only when the tuning algorithm is
set to [for Moving target].
Default
: Specific
Setting range : Specific (90 to 9990 s), TUNING
Dynamic range
Set the dynamic range of the scanned data. Select from Hi-Sensitive/Hi-SNR or Hi-DR (High dynamic range).
Default
: Hi-Sensitive/Hi-SNR
Setting range : Hi-Sensitive/Hi-SNR, Hi-DR
Offset
Set the offset value (black level) for the scanned data. This should not normally be changed from the initial value.
Default
: Default
Setting range : Default (0 to 254)
Internal lighting
Select whether to use the built-in lighting of the SR-600 Series.
Default
: Enable
Setting range : Disable or Enable
External lighting
Select whether to use external lighting.
When you set the OUT4 output to [EXT.LIGHT], select [Enable].
Default
: Disable
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-15
Processing setting
Set the options related to image processing and decoding.
Negative
Set whether to read white-on-black reversed codes.
Default
: Auto
Setting range : Disable, Enable, or Auto
Mirror
Set whether to read right-left flipped codes. This option cannot be selected in the scanning mode.
Default
: Disable
5
Digital filter
Select whether to use a filter. When [Specific] is selected, the specified filter will be used.
When the tuning algorithm is set to [for DPM target], [Raw] cannot be selected.
Default
: Auto (expand & shrink): for DPM target, Specific (Raw): Other
Setting range : Specific (Raw/Expand-low to high/Expand-low to high & Shrink/Shrink-low to high/Shrink-low to
high & Expand)
Auto (expand)/Auto (shrink)/Auto (expand & shrink)
ROI
Specify the range used for decoding.
Click the [ROI] button to open the decode range
specification window. You can specify the range
visually by dragging the edges of the range in the
window.
The area out of the range is filled with green.
Capture
Whole
: Start scanning within the specified

decode range.
: Set the whole range as the decode
range.
Default
: Left - 0
Top - 0
Right - 751
Bottom - 479
Setting range: X-axis 0 to 751 (Left even, Right

odd)
Y-axis: 0 to 479
Definition of coordinates
X
(0, 0)
* The range must be greater than 100 for both the

X and Y axes.
(751, 479)
Timeout setting
Set the decode timeout.
Default
: Unlimited
Setting range : 100 ms, 200 ms, Unlimited, Specific (10 to 2550 ms)
(3)
5-16
Process flow
The process flow is displayed.
The process currently displayed on the detailed settings tab is highlighted.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
Manual tuning
Click the
icon to display the manual tuning screen.
On this screen, you can set the settings of the parameter bank individually.
For details of the individual setting items, refer to "Parameter bank setting information (Page 5-11)".
(2)
(1)
5
(3)
(1)
Bank settings
The individual setting items for the parameter bank are displayed.
To set the items, select the corresponding tab.
(2)
Process flow
The process flow is displayed.
The process of the currently selected tab is highlighted.
(3)
Update
Click this button to write the settings of the selected parameter bank into the ROM of the SR-600 Series.
Since this operation only sends the settings of the selected parameter bank, the communication time is
shorter than when all settings are sent with the [Send settings] button.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-17
Bank test
Click the
icon to display the bank test screen.
On this screen, you can perform reading tests by using the settings of the selected parameter bank.
Refer to "3-5 Test Mode" for more details on the test mode.
(1)
(2)
(3)
5-18
(1)
Laser aiming
Click this to activate the laser pointer on the SR-600 Series.
(2)
Start/stop the reading rate check mode

Activate the reading rate test mode.
(3)
Start/stop the processing time check mode

Activate the tact measurement test mode.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
Code
This section explains how to set the reading codes for the SR-600 Series.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Each code from 1 to 8 can have options (1) to (4) changed.

(1)
Code
Select a code type to read.
Not selected
2D code
Bar code
Composite character
QR
DataMatrix
CODE39
ITF
JAN/EAN/UPC(JAN13, JAN8, UPC-E)
CODE93
GS1 DataBar
CC-A/CC-B(GS1 Databar)
CC-A/CC-B/CC-C(GS1-128)
PDF417
2of5
CODE128
MaxiCode
NW-7
COOP2of5
CC-A/CC-B(EAN/UPC)
For the setting method for JAN13, JAN8, and UPC-E, refer to "Read code detailed settings (Page 5-21)".
The default settings are as follows.
(2)
Code 1
QR
Code 2
DataMatrix
Code 3
PDF417
Code 4
GS1 Databar (RSS)
Code 5
CODE39
Code 6
CODE128
Code 7
NW-7 (Codabar)
Code 8
JAN/EAN/UPC
Length
The range of the acceptable code length is set according to the maximum and minimum lengths.
To change the displayed maximum and minimum code lengths, click the [Edit] button and set the maximum
and minimum code lengths.
The maximum and minimum code lengths that can be set are different for each code type.
When reading bar codes, the code length includes the start and stop characters and the check digit.
Click the [OK] button after inputting the minimum and maximum code lengths.
When you select a composite character (CC-A/CC-B/CC-C) code, set the number of digits of the bar code
and 2D code respectively.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-19
(3)
Detail
To change the code detail conditions for a code, click the [Detail] button and change the values on the screen
that appears.
The reading conditions that can be set are different for each code.
Click the [OK] button after inputting the values to set the reading conditions.
Refer to "Read code detailed settings" (Page 5-21) for more details on setting information.
(4)
Options
Click the [Options] button to display the options setup screen, which allows you to set the output length
limitation function.
Set the output length limitation function to send only the data starting from the specified digit of the code data
up to the number of digits specified in [Output length].

Direction can be set to Disabled, Forward, or Backward.
If Forward or Backward is selected, an output length and a starting location must be specified.
The values that can be set for the starting location and the output length are different for each code.
Click the [OK] button after inputting the values to set those values for the output length limitation function.
For example, when the read data is "49123456", the output data changes depending on the settings.
(Example 1) Mode
: Forward
: Backward
Output length : 5
Origin
Origin
:2
Second from the first digit
4 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
Output length: 5
5-20
(Example 2) Mode
Output length : 5
:2
Second from the last digit
4 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
Output length: 5
SR-600-M-NO5-E
Range of the maximum and minimum number of digits

The table below shows the maximum and minimum number of digits available for each barcode type.
For composite characters (CC-A/CC-B/CC-C), set the maximum and minimum number of digits of the bar code and
2D code respectively. The setting range is the same as the range for the corresponding code.
Barcode type
Max./min. number of
digits
1 to 7089
DataMatrix
1 to 3116
PDF417
1 to 2710
MaxiCode
1 to 138
GS1 Databar (RSS)
1 to 74
CODE39
3 to 50
ITF
2 to 50
2of5
1 to 50
NW-7 (Codabar)
3 to 50
CODE128
1 to 128
COOP 2of5
2 to 50
CODE93
1 to 50
Read code detailed settings

You can specify detailed conditions for each code type.
When you select composite characters (CC-A/CC-B/CC-C) as a target code, you can set the detailed conditions of
the individual codes included in the characters.
Multi Read setting

The multi read setting allows multiple codes of the same type to be read in one reading action.
The multi read setting is available for all 2D and bar codes. It cannot be used for composite character codes.
For details of the multi read, refer to "Reading Mode (Page 4-10)".
The multi read allows reading of two to four codes.

When [Allow fewer detection] is checked, the reading is considered to be successful when at least one code is
read successfully.
Important
SR-600-M-NO5-E
When [Structured append mode] is selected for QR codes, the multi read option cannot be set.
5-21
QR
Detail settings for 2D codes

The screen that is displayed depends on which code is selected.
The detail setting contents for reading 2D codes are as follows:
Barcode type
Detail setting options
QR
MicroQR, Structured append mode
DataMatrix
Rectangular Data Matrix
PDF417
MicroPDF417
QR
DataMatrix
5
Important
For QR codes, [Structured append mode] and [Multi read] cannot be set at the same time.
PDF417
Bar code detailed settings

The screen that is displayed depends on which code is selected.
The setting contents are as follows:
z Reading bar codes with short margins

Check [Allow short margin] to read bar codes with short quiet zones (margins).
* The quiet zone (margin) will differ with the scan conditions.
The short margin reading is available for the following bar codes:
CODE39
NW-7 (Codabar)
JAN/EAN/UPC
CODE128
CODE93
5-22
SR-600-M-NO5-E
z Individual bar code settings

CODE39
ITF
Inspect check-digit [Modulus 10/3] ...................................... When this option is checked, [Send check-digit] is
enabled.
Send check-digit................................................................... Check this to send read data, including the check digit,
to the host computer.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-23
Send start/stop characters (*)..................................Check this to send read data, including the start/stop character
(*), to the host computer.
Inspect check-digit [Modulus 43] ............................When this option is checked, [Send check-digit] is enabled.
Send check-digit......................................................Check this to send read data, including the check digit, to the
host computer.
Trioptic CODE39 ......................................................Check this to allow reading of Trioptic CODE39.
JAN/EAN/UPC
5
EAN/JAN-13 .............................................................Check this to allow reading of EAN/JAN 13 digits.

EAN/JAN-8 ...............................................................Check this to allow reading of EAN/JAN 8 digits.
UPC..........................................................................Check this to allow reading of UPC.
UPC-A output ...........................................................When reading UPC-A, select whether to output the data as 12 or
13 digits.
Add '0' as system code to UPC-E............................Check this to append a "0" to the head of read data.
2-digit Supplemental................................................Check this to read 2-digit supplemental characters.
5-digit Supplemental................................................Check this to read 5-digit supplemental characters.
Ignore UPC without supplemental ...........................Check this to allow reading of the UPC code with supplemental
characters only.
GTIN 14 digits output ..............................................Add a "0" to the head of the data and output as 14 digits.
NW-7 (Codabar)
Start/stop characters ...............................................Check this to send read data, including the start/stop character
(*), to the host computer.
Inspect check-digit ..................................................When this option is checked, [Check-digit algorithm] and [Send
check-digit] are enabled.
Check-digit algorithm...............................................Select the method used for the check digit calculation.
Send check-digit......................................................Check this to send read data, including the check digit, to the
host computer.
5-24
SR-600-M-NO5-E
CODE128
GS1 DataBar (RSS)
GS1 DataBar Truncated...........................................Check this to allow reading of GS1 DataBar/GS1 DataBar

Truncated.
GS1 DataBar Stacked (Omnidirectional) .................Check this to allow reading of GS1 DataBar Stacked/GS1
DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional.
GS1 DataBar Limited ...............................................Check this to allow reading of GS1 DataBar Limited.
GS1 DataBar Expanded........................................... Check this to allow reading of GS1 DataBar Expanded.
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked ............................Check this to allow reading of GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-25
GS1-128(UCC/EAN-128) .........................................Check this to support GS1-128 (UCC/EAN-128).

The SR-600 Series outputs "FNC1," which displays the variable
length separator via [GS] (1Dh).
Communication
This section explains how to set the communication conditions for the SR-600 Series.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
RS-232C communication conditions settings

Set this to match the connected external devices.
Baud rate
Select 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps.
Default : 115200 bps
Parity
Select None, Even, or Odd.
Default : Even
Data bits
Select the data length from 7 or 8 bits.
Default : 8 bits
Stop bit
Select 1 or 2 bits.
Default : 1 bit
Important
To send Kana, Kanji, or image data, set the data length to 8 bits.
(2)
Multi-drop link selection

Select [Enable] when connected to an N-410 and then set the ID number.
(3)
Communication Protocol
This specifies the protocol used for communication.
Refer to
"Communication Protocols (Page 7-3)" for a more detailed explanation on communication
protocol.
RTS/CTS
Select either Disable or Enable for the RTS/CTS protocol setting.
Default : Disable
Handshaking
Select None, PASS/RTRY, or ACK/NAK for the communication protocol.
Default : None
Important
5-26
When connecting the SR-600 Series to the N-UB or N-L1 dedicated communication unit, the RTS/CTS
protocol must be set to [Enable].
SR-600-M-NO5-E
(4)
Send data format settings

Refer to
"Read Data Communication Format (Page 7-5)" for a more detailed explanation on send data.
Format length
This appends the number of characters to each data transmission.
Checksum
Select [Excluded] or [Included] for appending the checksum.
Default : Excluded
Header/Delimiter
This sets the header and delimiter of the send data.
Header
: Select from None, ESC, STX, or Custom.
When selecting Custom, enter the header using five or less ASCII or hexadecimal
Delimiter
characters as desired.
: Select from CR, CR+LF, ETX or Custom.
When selecting Custom, enter the header using five or less ASCII or hexadecimal
characters as desired.
Character
Partition mark
: The selected character is used as a separator in send data.

Select one ASCII or hexadecimal character.
Default : ":" 3A
Inter delimiter
: The selected character is used as a separator for appended data.

Select five ASCII or hexadecimal character.
Default : "," 2C
Composite delimiter
: The selected character is used as a separator for composite characters.

Select up to five ASCII or hexadecimal characters.
Default : None
(5)
Output filling
When the size of the data to be sent is less than the setting value, a specified character can be added to
make the data the specified size.
Total size
: Set the size of the data including the added data.
Setting value
: 0 to 999
Default
: 0
Filling character : Specify a character to be added.

Setting value
: 1 ASCII character (2 HEX characters)
Default
: " " 20
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-27
Operation
Set the reading mode.
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
5
(5)
(1)
Reading mode
Select one of the following four choices:
Single
: Reads one code for each trigger input signal.
Continuous
: Reads multiple codes in series for each trigger input signal.

To make sure that no code is read twice, set a repeat reading interval.
Bank collection : Performs reading for all of the specified parameter banks for each trigger input signal.
Burst read
: Performs scanning for a specified bank, up to 8 scans, for each trigger input signal. After
the scanning is complete, the first code read, based on these parameters, is sent.
* Default: Single
(2)
Data transmission
Select one of the following timing settings to send read data:
at reading end
at trigger end
* Default: at reading end
(3)
(4)
Same code blocking interval

When selecting the continuous read mode, set the time to prevent reading the same code twice.
Setting range
: 100 to 25500 ms (in units of 100 ms)
Default
: 1000 ms
Laser-aimer blinking duration

When selecting the continuous or bank collection read mode, set the time to activate the laser pointer.
While the laser-pointer is blinking, scanning is disabled.
(5)
Setting range
Default
: 100 ms
Burst read options

These options are displayed when the burst read mode is selected:
Parameter bank
: Set the parameter bank No. used for burst read.
Burst count
: Set the number of continuous scans for a trigger input.
Default
Burst interval
: 3
: Set the interval between the scans performed continuously.
Setting range : 0 to 255 ms

Default
5-28
: 0 ms
SR-600-M-NO5-E
(6)
Read error string

If the code cannot be read, an error code is sent as the data.
Up to 8 characters (16 HEX characters) : Use ASCII or HEX.
Setting this to a space means that no error code is sent.
Default
(7)
: ERROR (4552524F52h)
Additional information
The selected items will be appended to the scanned data when the data is sent.
Select items as needed.
Based on the selected items, the data format to be output is shown under [Format].
Refer to "Appending Data (Page 7-5)" for send data format.
5
"Read Data" will always be output.
When [PMI] is checked, the [PMI Setting] option appears. Enter the PMI
preset values (L1 to L4).
(8)
Alternate setup
Set the options related to the alternate function. These options cannot be selected when the burst read mode
is set.
Bank ordering function
Select whether to start scanning/decoding from the bank for which the last reading was successful.
Acceleration by success
Registry order
Alternate start bank
Specify the parameter bank No. to start reading while the alternate function is used.
Default
: 1
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-29
TIP
Trigger
Set the trigger input conditions for reading.
(1)
(2)
5
(1)
Trigger type
Select one of the following two trigger types:
Level trigger (Default) : Reads codes and begins scanning when the trigger input is received.
When reading has finished, scanning will stop and the data will be sent.
One-shot trigger
: Reads codes for the specified one-shot trigger duration when a trigger input turns
on.
When reading has finished or the one-shot trigger duration ends, scanning will
cease and the data will be sent.
When selecting this option, set the one-shot trigger duration.
Setting range : 100 to 25500 ms (in units of 10 ms)
Default
: 1000 ms
Refer to "Trigger Type (Page 4-5)" for a detailed explanation.

* Default: Level trigger
(2)
Trigger on command, Trigger off command

This controls the character strings used to send input on/off commands.
Setting range : Up to 8 characters
Default
: On command "LON" (4C4F4E)

Off command "LOFF" (4C4F4646)
5-30
SR-600-M-NO5-E
I/O
Specify the options for the multi I/O function of the SR-600 Series.
(3)
(1)
5
(2)
(1)
Input terminal
Set the operation of the input terminals (IN1 and IN2).
INn Function (n = 1 or 2)
Setting value
: No function, TIMING, PRESET, TEST, TUNING
Default
: IN1 = TIMING
IN2 = PRESET
* When you select "TEST", specify the test mode desired.

Setting value
: Reading rate check, Tact check, Position check
Default
: Reading rate check
IN LED
Check this option to let the terminal synchronize with the input LED.
Power-on trigger
Check this option to activate the input function specified for INn at power-on.
Input polarity
Specify the polarity of the input terminal.
Setting value
: Norm. open (normally open) or Norm. close (normally closed)
Default
: Norm. open
Required input duration

Set the time delay before the input terminal turns on.
Setting value
: 1, 2, 10 ms
Default
: 1 ms
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-31
(2)
Output terminal
Set the functions of the output terminals (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4).
OUTn Function (n = 1 to 4)
Setting value
: OK, NG, ERROR, PRESET, TUNING, TRG BUSY, USB BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY,
Default
: OUT1-OK
EXT.LIGHT
OUT2-NG, ERROR
OUT3-ERROR
OUT4-TRG BUSY, USB BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY
Output duration
5
Important
Setting value
Default
: 500 ms
You cannot set both the result output (OK, NG, ERROR, PRESET, and TUNING) and the operation
output (TRG BUSY, USB BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY and EXT.LIGHT) to the same respective
terminals.
The EXT.LIGHT output can be set to OUT4 only.
BUSY Output at Power On

Check this option to turn on the TRG BUSY output for 500 ms when the power is turned on.
Setting value
: Disable or Enable
Default
: Enable
External lighting output setting

When the external lighting output is set to OUT4, you can set the polarity of the output terminal.
(3)
Setting value
: Norm. open (normally open) or Norm. close (normally closed)
Default
: Norm. open
D-Sub 9pin type

When the OP-80616 conversion cable is used, IN2, OUT3, and OUT4 terminals cannot be used with the D-sub
9-pin connector.
To use the D-sub 9-pin connector, select this check box to hide the terminals which cannot be used.
5-32
SR-600-M-NO5-E
Option
This section explains the verification/preset settings and the settings for each button.
(1)
5
(2)
(6)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
Verification setup
Set this to use the preset function.
Verification is activated in "Single" read mode.
For details of the preset and verification functions, refer to "3-4 Preset/Verification".
Type
Select whether to verify a constant string or sequential numbers.
Origin
This specifies the location where the verification starts.
Length
This specifies the length of the verification.
Increment
When selecting [Auto increment], set the number to add to/subtract from the value when its verification is
successful.
Preset data
This registers preset data to use for verification.
The following special characters can be used:
Special
character
(2)
(3)
(4)
Meaning
Example
This is treated as a single

character.
ABC? : Any four-character code beginning with ABC will be verified

??? : All 3-digit codes will be verified
This is treated as multiple

characters.
ABC! : Any code beginning with ABC will be verified
TUNE button
Check [Lock] to disable the
button.
TEST button
Check [Data transmission] to output the test result data with the
button.
Laser aimer option

This controls the operation conditions for the laser pointer.
Select from [Lock], [Test mode only], [Operation mode only] or [By operation].
(5)
9-segment LED
Check [Display bank number] to display the bank number of the current scan parameters on the multi-LED.
(6)
NG image memory
This sets the location where images that generated an error will be stored.
When selecting [ROM], specify the burst number to store an image during burst reading.
Select Disabled, RAM or ROM.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-33
Installation Guide
You can select the appropriate model based on the size of the code to be used and the code reading conditions.
(1)
5
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Code specification check

The specifications of the code to be read can be selected.
Fill two of the three fields with Cell size, Symbol size, and Code size (No. of cells in one side).
The codes supported by the specification check are: QR, MicroQR, DataMatrix, CODE39, CODE128,
GS1 Databar, composite.
(2)
Field view display

The field of view obtained with the specified
model and working distance is displayed,
along with the size of the code in that field.
(3)
Model and mounting distance settings

Select the model to be used as well as the working distance.
The smallest readable cell size is automatically calculated from the code specifications and working distance.
The table shows the reading capabilities under the specified conditions with color-coding:
Black: Reading possible
Orange: Attention required (Reading is possible, but margins are small.)
Red: Reading not possible
(4)
Moving
The maximum exposure time is calculated for the reading of a moving target.
When the tuning algorithm is set to [for Moving target], the tuning should be performed
with the exposure time set to this value or less.
"Tuning policy setup (Page 5-15)"
5-34
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-5 Sending/Receiving Settings

This section explains the transmission of settings between the AutoID Navigator software and the SR-600 Series.
Sending Settings to the SR-600 Series

Before starting this procedure, confirm that connection with the SR-600 Series has been established. (
4)
Click the
Page 5-
button.
5
Confirm the displayed message and then click the [OK] button.
"Connecting..." is displayed.
When the transmission finishes with the message "Setting completed", the settings specified on the
individual tabs have been written to the SR-600 Series.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-35
5-5 Sending/Receiving Settings
Receiving Settings from the SR-600 Series

Before starting this procedure, confirm that connection with the SR-600 Series has been established. (
4)
Click the
Confirm the displayed message and then click the [OK] button.
Page 5-
button.
5
"Connecting..." is displayed.
When the reception finishes with the message "Reading completed", the settings of the SR-600 Series have
been reflected on the tabs of the AutoID Navigator.
5-36
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-6 Saving/Reading a Setting File

The specified settings can be saved as a setting file or read from a setting file.
Saving a Setting File

You can save the settings specified with AutoID Navigator as a setting file.
Click the
Note
icon.
This operation is disabled when a project is selected in the System configuration display.
5
When the [Save As] dialog box is displayed, enter the file name.
A file name can be specified with 8 characters or less.

The file is saved with the "aic" extension.
Click the [Save] button.

The settings will be saved in the specified file.
TIP
You can also save the settings as a project file.

Click the
icon.
The extension "aic" is appended to project files when they are saved.
For details of the operation procedure, refer to "AutoID Navigator User's Manual".
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-37
5-6 Saving/Reading a Setting File
Reading Setting Files

Saved setting files can be loaded.
Click the
Note
icon.
This operation is disabled when a project is selected in the System configuration display.
5
Select a file from the [Open] dialog box.
Click the [Open] button.

The settings saved in that file will be reflected in each setting tab.
TIP
You can also read the settings saved in a project file.

Click the
icon.
The extension "aic" is appended to project files when they are saved.
For details of the operation procedure, refer to
"AutoID Navigator User's Manual".
5-38
SR-600-M-NO5-E

The settings made with AutoID Navigator can be printed as a 2D codes, which can be read into the SR-600 Series
and thus set all of the parameters for that device at once.
Printing Quick Setup Codes
Click the
icon.
Enter any necessary comments.
Note
Any comments that have been entered will be printed.
Click the [Print] button.
Important
When reading the quick setup code with the high-resolution type model (SR-600HA), make sure to use a
printer with high print quality. When a printer with low print quality is used, the cells in the 2D code may
bleed and become unreadable. Be sure to use a printer with 300 dpi or more for printing.
[Printout sample]
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-39
Reading the Quick Setup Code

Use the
button to read a printed batch setting code into the SR-600 Series.
Refer to "Reading the quick setup code (Page 3-21)" for the operation method.
5
5-40
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-8 Terminal and Test Mode

Using the Terminal Screen
When connected to the SR-600 Series, click
to display the terminal screen.
Use the terminal screen to display data read with the SR-600 Series or to send commands to the SR-600 Series.
(1)
(2)
(3)
5
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
Target
This displays the currently connected SR-600 Series.
(2)
Full screen
Click this button to maximize the screen.
To resize the maximized screen, click the [Normal screen] button.
(3)
Edit message
This sets the data format in which commands are sent to the SR-600 Series.
Select the options according to the settings of the connected device.
Header/delimiter
: Select NONE/CR or STX/ETX.
NONE/CR
Header
: None
Delimiter : CR
STX/ETX
Header
: STX
Delimiter : ETX
Format
: "None" is displayed when the SR-600 Series is connected.
Send command
: Enter a command to be sent to the SR-600 Series
When you enter a command, the [Check command] field shows the command format edited according to
the selected header/delimiter and format.
Clicking the [Send] button sends the command shown in the [Check command] field to the SR-600 Series.
Instead of entering a command, you can select one of the previously sent commands from the pull-down
menu.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-41
(4)
Barcode
LON : Click this button to send the "Trigger on command" to the connected SR-600 Series.
Send command and read data are displayed in the log display area.
When the [Single] reading mode and the data transmission [at reading end] are selected, it is
unnecessary to click the [LOFF] button after the reading has finished successfully.
LOFF : Click this button to send the "Trigger off command" to the connected SR-600 Series.
5
(5)
Save log
Commands sent to the SR-600 Series as well as received data can be saved in a log file.
Click the [Save log] button, and when the [Save As] dialog box is displayed, specify the name of the file to
save the log.
[Option] Setting
Check "Add" to save the subsequent logs in the same file.
Check "Binary" to save the data in binary format.
Example: Contents of a log file when LON was sent to the SR-600 Series
* To save a log, you need to click the button before sending a command or receiving data.
(6)
Clear buffer
Click this button to clear all data displayed in the log display area.
TIP
5-42
In the terminal, only ASCII characters are displayed. Japanese and other 2-byte characters are not
displayed correctly.
Characters that are not displayed in ASCII are displayed as their character codes in hexadecimal.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
Sending a command
This section explains the procedure to send commands to the SR-600 Series.
The procedure to send the "LON" and "LOFF" commands is explained as an example.
Confirm that the SR-600 Series is connected and then click the
button.
Refer to "Connection Update between AutoID Navigator and the SR-600 Series (Page 5-4)" for connection
confirmation.
In the Send command field, enter "LON" and click the [Send] button.
Instead of entering a command, you can select one of the previously sent commands from the pull-down menu.
The log display area shows the log of the sent command.
The response from the SR-600 Series will also be displayed in the log display area.
To finish reading, enter "LOFF" in the Send command field and click the [Send] button.
The log display area shows the log of the sent command.
If logs are set to be saved, the contents of the log display area will also be saved in a log file.
* When the SR-600 Series is set to the [Single] reading mode and data transmission [at reading end], it is
unnecessary to send "LOFF" after the bar code is read successfully.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-43
Using Test Mode

to display the test mode screen.
Use the test mode screen to control the SR-600 Series test modes.
(1)
(2)
(6)
5
(1)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(7)
Target
Select the SR-600 Series to run in test mode. SR-600 Series scanners that are not connected cannot be
selected.
(2)
Test mode
Select one of the following three test modes:
Reading rate check
If [Period] is checked and a time is set, test mode is activated only for the specified time.
Processing time check
Position check
Refer to "3-5 Test Mode" for details about Test mode.
(3)
Result
The final test results are displayed.
The data that appears in the test results depends on the type of test being run.
Reading rate check
Processing time check
Position check
5-44
SR-600-M-NO5-E
(4)
Save csv log

Test results can be saved as csv files.
The example below displays the contents of a saved log file for a position test.
Start/Stop
Click the [Start] button to start the test.
The [Start] button will change to the [Stop] button when the test starts. Click the [Stop] button to end the test.
If the [Save csv log] button is depressed, clicking the [Start] button will cause the [Save As] dialog box to
appear.
Specify the name of the file to save the test results to.
[Option] settings
If [Save Data] is checked, clicking the [Start] button will cause the test results to be saved in the history file.
(6)
Pointer On
Click this to activate the laser pointer on the SR-600 Series.
(7)
Clear buffer
All of the test result data being displayed is cleared.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-45
(5)
5-9 Live View and Load Image

Live View
When you click the Live view icon while the SR-600 Series is connected through USB, the Live view screen appears.
The Live view screen shows an image of every scan in real time.
Contents of the live view screen

(6)
(1)
(4)
5
(7)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(8)
5-46
(1)
Start/Stop button
Click this button to start/stop updating the Live view screen.
(2)
Image display
The scanned image is displayed here. When a code is recognized, it is indicated with a green frame.
The image can be enlarged by double-clicking. Click [Esc] to return to the standard view.
Screen frame : A blue frame indicates successful reading and a red frame indicates failed reading.
Bank No.
: The parameter bank No. of the currently displayed image is shown.
(3)
Data
When the reading is successful, the content of the read data is displayed.
(4)
Image display options

Set the options used to display the image.
Filtering : Select the conditions for displaying an image.
ALL
: Display all images.
OK
: Display only the images of successful readings.
NG
: Display only the images of failed readings.
Update : Select the parameter bank No. to show an enlarged image.
All
: Display the images of all parameter banks.
Selected: Display only the image of the parameter bank selected on the parameter banks display.
(5)
Enlarging/Saving the image

The image can be enlarged or saved.
Expand
: Click this button to enlarge the image. This operation is the same as double-clicking the
displayed image.
Save
: Click this button to display the image saving dialog to save the image.
(6)
Show details
Click this option to hide the images of the other parameter banks.
(7)
Show all parameter banks

Display the latest images of all parameter banks.
Clicking the image of a specific bank displays its enlarged image.
(8)
Clear
Clear the currently displayed image.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
In the burst read mode

In the burst read mode, the Live view screen is shown as follows:
(3)
(1)
(2)
(1)
Read history display

The scan time and decode time for each burst read operation are shown in a graph.
Orange: Scan time
Light blue: Decode time
Gray : Reading impossible
(2)
Reading statistics table

This table shows the read time, scan time and decode time for each trigger input, the minimum, maximum and
average times to transfer the image to the Live view screen, and the result of the latest reading.
The read time is the sum of the scan time and decode time.
(3)
Image rotation
Every time one of these buttons is clicked, the image is rotated right or left by 90 degrees.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-47
Image Retrieval
to display the image read screen.
Use the image screen to confirm and display images that the SR-600 Series has stored on the device.
(1)
(2)
(3)
5
(4)
(1)
Reader ID
The SR-600 Series used to obtain an image is selected.
(2)
Display selection
There are two displays to allow two images to be compared.
Select a display on which to show the captured or obtained image.

Display 1
: Upper display
Display 2
: Lower display
button
Click this to open the current image in a separate window.
5-48
SR-600-M-NO5-E
button
Click this to display the [Save As] dialog box. Specify a filename.
The file will be saved as a JPG file with this name.
5
(3)
Instant Capture
Select a parameter bank number under [Bank No.].

Click the [Capture] button to have the SR-600 Series scan an image.
Click the [Stop] button to end the image scanning (the suspended image cannot be saved).
(4)
Load image
Alternate/Burst read
When the burst read mode is selected, [Burst] is displayed. Otherwise, [Alternate] is displayed.
Latest image ([Latest image 1 to 8] for burst read)
The most recently confirmed image.
NG images 1 to 16 ([NG images 1 to 8] for burst read)
The images are saved in each parameter bank of the SR-600 Series.
The SR-600 Series only saves images when the save image setting is enabled.
Refer to "3-9 Image Saving Function" for more details on images.
Call
This confirms the image.
Load
This obtains the most recently selected image or NG image.
Clear
The most recent image and all NG images are erased from the SR-600 Series.
Stop
Stops obtaining images.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
5-49
Reading images
This section describes the procedure to load images captured with the SR-600 Series.
Confirm that the SR-600 Series is connected and then click the button.
Refer to "Connection Update between AutoID Navigator and the SR-600 Series (Page 5-4)" for the procedure to
confirm the connection.
To obtain NG images, select a new image or an NG image number from 1 to 16 and click the [Load] button.
When scanning, select a parameter bank number from the scan settings and click the [Capture] button.
The image will be captured and displayed on the selected display.
5
5-50
If necessary, expand or save the image.
SR-600-M-NO5-E
6
Mounting the SR-600 Series
This chapter describes mounting and mounting precautions for the SR-600
Series.
6-1
6-2
6-3
SR-600-M-NO6-E
Mounting the SR-600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Installing the Dedicated Communication Unit . . . . 6-6
Installing the NX-50CL Network Controller . . . . . . . 6-9
6-1
6-1 Mounting the SR-600 Series

This chapter describes how to properly mount the SR-600 Series readers.
Before Mounting the SR-600 Series:

Check the following before mounting the SR-600 Series
Confirm that ambient light (sunlight, overhead lighting, photoelectric sensors, etc.)
is not affecting the SR-600 Series.
Prevent ambient light from entering the light receiving area of the SR-600 Series. Ambient light may lead to unstable
reading.
Shield from ambient light.
6
Photoelectric
sensor
Countermeasure
Change the sensor position.
Verify that the reader's beam is not obstructed.

If the scanner is obstructed, the code may be unreadable.
Obstruction
Countermeasure
Illumination
Change the position of the obstruction

to ensure the passage of the light.
Code
Check whether the reader's angle creates a specular reflection.

If the beam is aimed perpendicularly to the code, a specular reflection could result. It will then be difficult for the
reader to scan the code, and therefore may provide unstable data.
Countermeasure
15
Illumination
Be sure to mount the scanner at

an angle.
6-2
SR-600-M-NO6-E
When using several SR-600 Series in a row, verify that they do not interfere with each
other.
If light from one SR-600 Series unit enters the receiver of another, the reading may become unstable.
Provide
sufficient
distance
between the
SR-600 Series
units.
SR-600 Series
Countermeasure
2D Code
Install a shield.

Using the included mounting bracket
Attach the SR-600 Series to the mounting bracket.

Secure the mounting bracket with the included M3 screws.
Mounting bracket
Included
installation
screws
M3 x2
Mounting bracket
Secure the mounting bracket to the device.

Secure the mounting bracket to the device using the installation screws, purchased separately, with the included insulating spacers
and washers. The installation screws should be at least 3.7 mm (thickness of the bracket, washer, etc.) + 3 mm long.
Washer
Insulating
spacer
Installation
screw (M4)
CAUTION
SR-600-M-NO6-E
Make sure to attach the included insulating spacers to prevent excessive noise from
the device.
Reading errors may occur if the insulating spacers are not attached.
6-3
Attaching directly to the device

Secure the SR-600 Series with screws (M3).
Note
The installation screws, purchased separately, should not be any longer than the length of the plate
thickness + 4 mm.
Installation
screws (M3)
6
Use insulating material when installing the SR-600 Series to prevent excessive noise
from the device.
Reading errors may occur if the insulating material is not attached.
CAUTION
Adjusting the Installation Angle

The scanner of the SR-600 Series should be positioned at an angle of 15 in relation to the 2D code or bar code
surface.
Reading distance
15
Reading distance
Adjusting the Reading and Installation Angle
Press the
button on the SR-600 Series. The laser pointer activates.
Adjust the installation position based on the appropriate SR-600 Series model.
For the SR-600/600HA

The distance at which the left and right laser beams
intersect is the optimal reading distance.
Adjust the laser pointer intersection so that it lies directly
in the middle of the 2D code or bar code.
38 mm
(SR-600HA)
60 mm
(SR-600)
For the SR-610

The two laser pointers indicate the reading width. Adjust
the laser pointers so that the 2D code or bar code is
directly in the middle.
100 mm
6-4
SR-600-M-NO6-E
Use the
button to check the reading stability in both the reading rate mode (hold TEST for 1 second) and
position mode (hold TEST for 3 seconds). Fine tune the reading distance and angle for the 2D codes or bar
codes that you plan to use.
TIP
Note
When using targets where there is low contrast between the code and the background, increase the
installation angle (greater than 20) to stabilize the reading.
Do not mount the scanner at an angle where the beam is nearly perpendicular to the 2D codes or bar
codes.
The reading may become unstable due to the light received from specular reflection.
20 or
more
6
15 or
more
The distances or angles that can be used for reading may vary with the size and print quality of the 2D
code or bar code being read.
Use the test modes to read the 2D code or bar code during installation.
SR-600-M-NO6-E
6-5
6-2 Installing the Dedicated Communication Unit

This section describes the procedure for mounting the N-R2/R4/UB/L1 dedicated communication unit.
Precautions
Mounting area
Install the dedicated communication unit vertically.
When the installation direction changes, provide adequate spacing so that heat does not build up.
Top
6
Bottom
For ventilation, provide spacing of 50 mm or more on the top and bottom of the N-R2/R4/UB/L1. As long as this is
the only source of heat generation, the unit can be installed without extra spacing on the right and left sides.
Provide spacing of 80 mm or more in the front of the unit so that the head and other wiring can be connected.
50 mm or more on the top and bottom; no extra spacing required on either side
80 mm or more in
front of the unit
50 mm
80 mm
50 mm
Installation precautions
When installing the dedicated communication unit, do not block the ventilation slots on the top and bottom of the
unit. Otherwise, heat may build up inside the unit, causing product failure.
If the temperature on the bottom of the unit may exceed the upper limit of the operating temperature (50C), take
appropriate measures such as applying forced air cooling or ensuring proper ventilation by increasing the
spacing around the unit so that the temperature does not exceed the upper limit of the operating temperature
(50C).
6-6
SR-600-M-NO6-E
Installing the Dedicated Communication Unit

Installing the dedicated communication unit on a DIN rail
Lower the mounting tab on the back of the N-R2/R4/UB/L1.

Verify that the mounting tab is in the position shown in the following diagram.
6
Mounting tab
Install the unit on the DIN rail as shown in the figure.
Tab
DIN rail
Secure the unit in place by raising the mounting tab on the back of the N-R2/R4/UB/L1.
Installing the Dedicated Communication Unit on the DIN rail
Tab
1. Hook the tab
on the rail.
DIN rail
2. Push in place.
Mounting tab
* Use a DIN rail that has a thickness of 1.1 mm or less.

SR-600-M-NO6-E
6-7
Removing the dedicated communication unit from the DIN rail
Lower the mounting tab as shown in B, in the following diagram, and then remove the communication unit.
Pull down with a

screw driver.
Mounting tab
6-8
After the communication unit is removed, return the mounting tab to the state shown in A.
SR-600-M-NO6-E
6-3 Installing the NX-50CL Network Controller

This section describes the procedure for installing the NX-50CL network controller.
The NX-50CL must be attached to a DIN rail.
Precautions
Mounting area
Install the network controller vertically.
When the installation direction changes, provide adequate spacing so that heat does not build up.
Top
6
Bottom
For ventilation, provide spacing of 50 mm or more on the top and bottom of the network controller.
Units may be installed directly to the left or right of the network controller only if the network controller is the only heat
generating source.
Leave at least 80 mm of spacing in front of the network controller for wiring.
50 mm or more on the top and bottom;

no extra spacing required on either side
80 mm or more in front of the unit
50
80
50
Do not block the ventilation holes on the top and bottom

When installing the network controller, do not block the ventilation holes on the top and bottom sides.
Otherwise, heat can build up inside the unit, causing product failure.
Notes about ambient temperature

If the temperature on the bottom of the unit may exceed the upper limit of the operating temperature (+55C), take
appropriate measures such as applying forced air cooling or ensuring proper ventilation by increasing the spacing
around the unit so that the temperature does not exceed the upper limit of the operating temperature (+55C).
SR-600-M-NO6-E
6-9
6-3 Installing the NX-50CL Network Controller
Installing the Network Controller

Installing the network controller on a DIN rail
Mounting onto the DIN rail.

Hook the DIN rail mounting tab (upper side) to the DIN rail.
DIN rail
6
DIN rail mounting tab (upper side)
Push the unit against the DIN rail until you hear a click.
Locked
Insufficient
lock (securing)
Removal from the DIN rail

While pressing down on the DIN rail mounting tab, pull the unit forward and remove it from the DIN rail.
6-10
SR-600-M-NO6-E
7
Serial Communication
7
This chapter describes serial communication between the computer and the
SR-600 Series.
7-1
7-2
7-3
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Data Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Command Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-1
7-1 Serial Communication

Serial communication is used to send data between the SR-600 Series and the computer to change the settings of
the SR-600 Series without using the AutoID Navigator software.
Serial Communication Formats

There are two serial communication formats that the SR-600 Series can use to communicate with a computer.
Both formats use ASCII code (
Page A-17) to communicate.
Data communication
This sends data read by the SR-600 Series to a computer.
Command communication
This sends commands from the computer to the SR-600 Series to change the device settings.
Serial Communication Settings
Before using serial communication, set the communication parameters of the SR-600 Series and the computer.
SR-600 Series settings

Use the AutoID Navigator to set the following settings:
Communication conditions : Baud rate, data bit length, parity, and stop bit length
Communication protocol
Communication data format: Header and terminator

Read error code
TIP
Page 7-24
Page 7-3
Page 7-5
Page 7-5
Set the same communication parameters for both the computer and the SR-600 Series.
Factory defaults for the SR-600 Series communication conditions

The factory default settings for SR-600 Series communication conditions are as follows:
Baud rate
: 115200 bit/s
Data bit length : 8 bit
Parity
: Even
Stop bit length : 1 bit
TIP
7-2
Hold the
button for 6 seconds or longer to put the SR-600 Series in default communication mode.
SR-600-M-NO7-E
7-2 Data Communication

This section describes the data format and communication protocols.
Communication Protocols
The SR-600 Series has four available protocols (data communication formats).
No Handshaking
The SR-600 Series sends data to the computer without handshaking.
Read data
SR-600 Series
PASS/RTRY
The SR-600 Series sends data to the computer using the following protocol:
The SR-600 Series sends data to the computer.
Read data
Response
SR-600 Series
The SR-600 Series waits for a response from the computer.
Note
The SR-600 Series can still read data while waiting for a response. Data read while waiting for a
response from the computer will be stored in the send buffer.
The computer sends one of the following responses to the SR-600 Series.
PASS: Transmission complete (The device does not respond to PASS).
RTRY: Resend the same data and wait for a PASS response.
Note
SR-600-M-NO7-E
If the SR-600 Series send buffer is overloaded, the device will perform the following actions and then
suspend operations:
The device sends "OVER" to the computer.
All data in the send buffer is cleared.
Send a "PASS" signal from the computer to the SR-600 Series to restore the device.
7-3
z PASS and RTRY formats

PASS
* ESC
CR
LF
(RTRY C R ), or ST X PASS E T X ( ST X RTRY E T X )

can be added to the start and end of the transmission.
Important
The SR-600 Series is able to receive any command while waiting for a PASS signal. This allows for a
response to be sent to a command (such as OK) without delay.
If the SR-600 Series receives a RESET command while waiting for a reply, the send buffer will be
cleared.
ACK/NAK
This protocol uses A C K (06h) instead of "PASS" and N A K (15h) instead of "RTRY".
Beside the differences in the character strings used, this protocol is identical to the PASS/RTRY protocol.
Important
suspend operations:
Send an "ACK" signal from the computer to the SR-600 Series to restore the device.
RTS/CTS
Depending on the RTS state of the computer, the SR-600 Series will operate as follows:
When the computer RTS (SR-600 Series CTS) is deactivated, the SR-600 Series will wait for a data transmission.
When the computer RTS is activated, the SR-600 Series will send data acquired while waiting.
The SR-600 Series can read codes while the computer RTS is off.
Data read while waiting for a response from the computer will be stored in the send buffer.
If the computer RTS is activated, the SR-600 Series will not respond to commands (such as OK).
If the communication type is set to RS-422A, the RTS/CTS protocol is not used.
For communication types other than RS-422A, the RTS/CTS protocol can be used.
Important
suspend operations:
Turn the computer RTS on to restore the SR-600 Series.
Send Buffer Capacity

The send buffer of the SR-600 Series can hold up to 10kB of data.
The number of characters for each entry includes the header and delimiter.
When the number of characters in data exceeds 10kB, the send buffer overflows.
If the send buffer overflows, the SR-600 Series will send an "OVER" message to the computer and then clear the
send buffer.
7-4
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Read Data Communication Format

Read data is sent to the computer with the header and delimiter already added, as shown below.
Header
Read data
Terminator
All types of data can be appended to read data (

Page 7-6).
The header and delimiter can be selected from the following using the AutoID Navigator. These can be set to any
value with up to five characters.
z Header
None/
ST X
(02h)
ESC
(1Bh)
z Terminator
/
CR
(0Dh)
CR
LF
(0Dh) (0Ah)
ETX
(03h)
Reading Error Codes

If the code cannot be read, the SR-600 Series will send a reading error code to the computer.
Default value
Header
ERROR
Terminator
Reading error codes can be set to any string of text, up to eight characters, using the AutoID Navigator (
5-29).
Additionally, the device can be set to not send error codes.
Page
Appending Data
All types of data can be appended to read data.
Read data format

The data format for appending all types of data to read data is shown below.
Data
size
Reading
time
Code type
: Brightness :
Symbol
ID
Position
Read
data
Code vertex
coordinates
Parameter
bank numbers
Code center
coordinates
Burst
No.
Unused
ECC
Reading
count
PMI
Checksum
Delimiter characters
The colon (:) as a delimiting character can be changed via the AutoID Navigator (one character). You cannot
delete this character.
The slash (/) character cannot be used as a delimiter.
No delimiter is inserted between "Symbol ID" and "Read data".
Precautions when appending data

Appended data can be set via a command or from the AutoID Navigator.
Only the selected data will be appended to the read data. This means that the data size is variable.
SR-600-M-NO7-E
7-5
Details of Appended Data

Data size
The data size is the total size of parts (1), (2), and (3), plus four bytes.
Header
(1)
(2)
(3)
Data size
Read data + appended data
Checksum
Terminator
Symbol ID
Add the symbology identifier, specified by AIM, before the read data.
Barcode type
QR code
7
DataMatrix
PDF417
Details
Symbol ID
Model 1
]Q0
Model 2
]Q1
Model 2, FNC1 first
]Q3
Model 2, FNC1 second
]Q5
ECC200
]d1
ECC200FNC1 first or fifth
]d2
ECC200FNC1 second or sixth
]d3
Normal
]L0
Extended channel interpretation
]L1
Basic channel interpretation
CODE39
]A0
Check digit is validated and transmitted.
]A1
Check digit is validated but not transmitted.
]A3
]I0
Check digit is validated and transmitted.
]I1
Check digit is validated but not transmitted.
]I3
NW-7(Codabar)
CODE128
]A8
No check digit validation
Industrial 2of5
JAN/EAN/UPC
]Z0
No check digit validation
Trioptic CODE39
ITF
]L2
-
MaxiCode
]S0
]F0
UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN/EAN13
]E0
JAN/EAN8
]E4
UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN/EAN13

Addon 2, addon 5
]E3
FNC1 not included.
]C0
FNC1 on the first digit (GS1-128).
]C1
FNC1 on the second digit.
]C2
CODE93
]G0
COOP2of5NEC2of5
]X0
GS1 Databar
]e0
z Format of symbol ID for composite characters

The symbol ID for composite characters is output in the following data format:
Data format for composite characters

Composite character
]e0
Bar code data
]Em
Bar code data
2D code data
(Example of GS1/CODE128+PDF)
Composite character
]e0
2D code data
(Example of JAN/EAN/UPC+PDF)
* m = Numeric value
* a = Composite delimiter (Can be changed with setting, up to 5 characters)
(Default: No setting)
7-6
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Code type
The type of read code can be appended before the read data.
Code type ID
Code type
Reading error
QR
DataMatrix
PDF417
MaxiCode
GS1-Databar
CODE39
ITF
Industrial 2 of 5
NW7(Codabar)
10
JAN/EAN/UPC
11
CODE128
12
COOP 2 of 5
13
CODE93
14
CC-A/CC-BGS1-Databar
15
CC-A/CC-BJAN/EAN/UPC
16
CC-A/CC-B/CC-CCODE128
7
Parameter bank numbers

Appends the number of parameter banks that were read.
Range for appended data : 01 to 16
Burst number
Outputs the burst number of the successfully read image in the burst read mode.
No data is appended for a failed reading.
This data is not appended in any mode other than the burst read mode.
Read count
Appends the number of reading attempts of the SR-600 Series while the trigger input was turned on.
Failed reading attempts are also counted.
Reading time
Appends the time required for the reading. (Unit: ms)
Brightness
Outputs the average of the code region's brightness for the read code.
When reading is performed in several regions in a field of view (conjugated QR, composite, or multi read), the
average of all code regions is output.
When reading fails, 0 is appended.
Position level
Appends the image position level.
average of all code regions is output.
When reading fails, 0 is appended.
Range for appended data : 0 to 5 (low to high)
SR-600-M-NO7-E
7-7
Code vertex coordinates/Code center coordinates

Appends the respective coordinates of the read code on the scanned image.
coordinates of all code regions are output in sequence.
The colon (:) as a delimiting character can be changed via the AutoID Navigator (one character limit).
The slash (/) character cannot be used as a delimiter.
Range for appended data : X direction: 0 to 751
Y direction: 0 to 479
Output format for appended data

Code vertex coordinates
Code center coordinates
: X1/Y1 : X2/Y2 : X3/Y3 : X4/Y4 : X1/Y2......When the delimiter is ":"

First code
Second code
: X5/Y5
(0, 0)
X
X1, Y1
X2, Y2
7
Code
X4, Y4
X3, Y3
Entire
TIP
X5, Y5
X1:Y1 to X4:Y4 are assigned so that X1:Y1 indicates the top left vertex of a code when it is oriented
normally.
For barcodes: Forward direction
For DataMatrix: The direction in which the finder pattern becomes an "L"
For QR codes: The direction in which the corner without a finder pattern is positioned in the lower right
Unused ECC ratio

Appends the unused error correction ratio (0 to 100%).
During composite and multi read operation, the unused error correction ratio of each code is appended individually.
The average value will be appended using conjugated QR.
This is not appended for read errors.
Range for appended data : 0 to 100%
The following codes append the unused ratio. All other codes will append 100%.
PDF417
MaxiCode
DataMatrix
QR
Micro PDF417
Composite characters (CC-A, CC-B, CC-C)
Preventative maintenance information (PMI)

The PMI number, which indicates the stability of code reading, can be appended.
Range for appended data : 0, 1, 2, or 9.
Criterion
PMI
Calculation formula
Evaluation
L2 reading brightness / calibration brightness L3
Normal
L1 reading brightness / calibration brightness < L2

L3 < reading brightness / calibration brightness L4
Caution
Reading brightness / calibration brightness < L1

L4 < reading brightness / calibration brightness
Warning
Reading error
* L1 to L4 can be set as standard levels for PMI.
Checksum
The checksum is calculated using all characters that are not part of the header or the delimiter and is then
appended immediately before the terminator.
7-8
SR-600-M-NO7-E
For calculation details, refer to

Header
"Checksum Calculation Method (Page A-15)" in the Appendix.
Read data + appended data
Checksum
Terminator
Checksum calculation range
7
SR-600-M-NO7-E
7-9
7-3 Command Communication

This section describes command communication between the SR-600 Series and the computer.
Types of Command Communication

There are two types of command:
Direct control commands

These are commands that directly control the SR-600 Series.
Setting commands
These are commands that change and confirm settings in the SR-600 Series.
Command Communication Process
The computer sends commands (direct control commands or setting commands) to the SR-600 Series.
Command
Response
SR-600 Series
The SR-600 Series sends responses (such as OK or error) to the computer.
Command Communication Format

Header, terminator
If the command format is set to
If the command format is set to
Command
Command
CR
ST X Command E T X
LF
ST X
CR
Command
, responses will be in the Response C R format.

E T X , responses will be in the ST X Response E T X format.
Response
Response
CR
ST X Response E T X
is appended at the end of the command. However,
Important
7-10
Command
LF
will not be added to the reply.
If E S C is added at the head of the data, the E S C will clear the SR-600 Series receive buffer.
If unnecessary characters appear, append E S C to the command communication.
When communicating with the SR-600 Series, make sure that each character (byte) is sent within 10
seconds of the previous character (byte). If more than 10 seconds pass, the SR-600 Series will delete
all received characters.
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Response error codes

An error will reply as "ERR**", where ** = error code.
Error code
00
Explanation
Command error
01
Code number not set
02
Mismatched command format

(Invalid character length in the command, sign or symbol in the command,
etc.)
03
05
The m value exceeds the set value

Parameter error
The nn,nnn,nnn value exceeds the set value
07
hhh... is not set in HEX (hexadecimal) code
10
There are 2 or more ! marks in the preset data

This command is not permitted in the current mode
21
Execution error
Cannot be executed (received) in the current state
22
USB communication
priority
No command can be accepted because the SR-600 Series is in the USB

control mode.
No command can be accepted because the SR-600 Series is not in the USB
control mode.
26
Quick setup code

reading error
27
Parameter error
31
35
40
41
Image read error

Tuning error
Character limit error
Failure to read all program codes

The read code cannot be an all settings code
The version of the read code is different.
No image was saved to this number
An image read command has been sent while the data length is 7 bits
There are no settings for this read code
Commands sent as a batch exceed 992 characters
Responses sent as a batch exceed 992 characters
42
Command error
23
Buffer overflow
The buffer has overflowed, so commands cannot be executed
ROM error
An error occurred while loading or saving parameters, so commands cannot

be executed.
24
A command not allowed in batch settings has been specified
If unnecessary characters are added to the commands, ERR00 will result. Example: SSETA, RP701
If there are abnormalities in the command parameters or format and a non-executable command is received,
the mode mismatch error (ERR20) takes priority.
However, if there are commands in the batch mode, the batch mode command error takes priority.
(If the meaning varies depending on the mode, such as with the TEST command, the result for the mode
which was effective during the command processing will be returned.)
If PASS/RTRY(ACK/NAK) is received during setting mode while PASS/RTRY(ACK/NAK) is active, ERR20 will be
displayed.
If PASS/RTRY is received while PASS/RTRY is not activated, ERR00 will be displayed.
SR-600-M-NO7-E
7-11
7
Mode mismatch
30
Area specification data is incorrect.
20
25
The n value exceeds the set value
06
11
Remarks
Undefined command received
Direct Control Commands

This section explains direct control commands.
Control of reading operations

Trigger on command
Send command : LON
Response
: None
Trigger on command with a specified parameter bank

This specifies a parameter bank and executes a read operation.
Send command : LONm (m = 1 to 16)
Response
: None
Trigger off command
Send command : LOFF

Response
: None
Reading via a command uses the same operations as reading via trigger input.
When the reading mode is set to "Single", and "At reading end" is selected for the data sending timing, there is no
need to send "LOFF" once reading has finished.
Commands can be customized, up to eight characters.
Registering preset data

Beginning preset data registration
Send command : PRON
Response
: None
Ending preset data registration

Send command : PROFF
Response
: None
Preset data can be up to 494 characters.
Test mode control

Activates and deactivates test mode.

Offline mode Send command
Response
Online mode Send command
Response
:
:
:
:
TEST1
OK
#TEST1
OK
Tact measurement test mode

Offline mode Send command
Response
Online mode Send command
Response
7-12
:
:
:
:
TEST2
OK
#TEST2
OK
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Barcode position test mode

Offline mode Send command : TEST3
Response
: OK
Burst read test mode

Online mode Send command : #TEST4
Response
: OK
Ending test mode
Offline mode Send command : QUIT

Response
: OK
Online mode Send command : #QUIT
Response
: OK
This outputs the results of each test after a response of OK.
Make sure to deactivate test mode after it has been activated.
If the commands to switch to settings mode (SSET) or reset mode (RESET) are received, test mode will end.
The position check mode cannot be used in online mode.
The burst read test mode cannot be used in offline mode.
7
Setting/confirming the alternate function

Specify the alternate priority bank and obtain the current order setting.
Specifying the alternate priority bank

Send command : BANKSET mm (mm: 01 to 16 parameter bank No.)
Response
: OK
Obtaining the alternate order

Send command : BANKORDER
Response
: nn/nn/nn/nn... (nn: 01 to 16 parameter bank No.)
Bank setting used for burst read

Specify or confirm the parameter bank setting used for burst reading.
Specifying the parameter bank No. used for burst read

Send command : BURSTSET mm (mm: 01 to 16 parameter bank No.)
Response
: OK
Obtaining the parameter bank No. used for burst read

Send command : BURSTGET
Response
: mm (mm: 01 to 16 parameter bank No.)
SR-600-M-NO7-E
7-13
I/O terminal control

Checks the input terminal status and controls ON/OFF of the output terminals.
Check the input terminal status

Send command : INnCHK
Response
: ON (The input terminal is turned on.)
: OFF (The input terminal is turned off.)
n = 1 (IN1 terminal) or 2 (IN2 terminal)
Turn on/off the output terminal (individual control)

Send command to turn on OUTn : OUTnON
Send command to turn off OUTn : OUTnOFF
Response
: OK
n = 1 to 4 (OUT1 to OUT4 terminals)
Turn on/off the output terminal (batch control)
Send command to turn on all outputs : ALLON

Send command to turn off all outputs : ALLOFF
Response
: OK
When two or more commands are sent, priority will be given to the command which is sent last.
Reset the SR-600 Series

Reset the SR-600 Series to the condition at power-on without actually turning off the power.
Send command : RESET
Response
: OK
* The SR-600 Series is reset after outputting the OK response. After sending the reset command, wait 2 seconds or
more before performing the next operation.
Clearing the send buffer

All data in the SR-600 Series send buffer is deleted.
Send command : BCLR
Response
: OK
Changing to setting mode, Closing the setting mode

This command switches from operation mode to setting mode and returns to operation mode from setting mode.
Change to setting mode Send command : SSET
Response
: OK
Quit setting mode
Send command SEND
Response
: OK
The SR-600 Series will switch to setting mode whenever the SSET command is received, even if the device is
carrying out a trigger command (such as LON) or is in test mode.
Remember to end setting mode with the end setting mode command (SEND).
7-14
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Confirming the read history

This displays the number of OK reads, NG reads, read errors, and the number of trigger inputs since the machine
was turned on.
Send command : NUM
Response
: OK/NG/ERROR/TIMING = a/b/c/d
a : No. of OKs (0 to 65535)
b : No. of NGs (0 to 65535)
c : No. of ERRORS (0 to 65535)
d : No. of timing inputs (0 to 65535)
The NUM command allows you to look at the read history.
Turning the power off or sending a RESET command will reset the read history.
This history does not include a count of OK/NG/ERR results obtained when registering preset data.
Tuning operation
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Parameters can be calibrated by sending commands and then saving them in a specified parameter bank.
Send command : TUNE mm (mm = parameter bank number 01 to 16)
Response
: OK
The output will be as follows:
Tuning Success : Tuning SUCCEEDED: a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m,n,o,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,w,x,y,z,A,B,C
a : Parameter bank numbers
b : Code number
c : Exposure time
d : Sensitivity
e : Dynamic range
f
: Brightness range
g : Decoding timeout
h : Internal bank retry count
i
: Right-left reverse
j
: Black-white reverse
k : Alternate setting
l
: Average brightness value in code region
m : Digital filter
n : Shutter delay
o : Offset
p : Area limit (aaa)
q : Area limit (bbb)
r
: Area limit (ccc)
s : Area limit (ddd)
t
: Internal light
u : External light
v : QR Algorithm
w : QR Allow clumsy cell
x : DM Algorithm
y : DM Allow clumsy cell
z : DataMatrix low contrast
A : DM Allow poor alignment
B : Allow low contrast
C : Image save location. "ROM" when set to save to ROM
"RAM" when set to save to RAM
Tuning Failed
: Tuning FAILED: a,bb,c,dd,e
a : Reason for failure (0: Symbol is unclear
1 : Unstable read
2 : Code setting error)
bb : Type of code read 1 (00 to 16)
c : Program no. of code read (1 to 8)
dd : Type of code read 2 (00 to 16)
e : Program no. of code read (1 to 8)
7-15
When the TUNE command is sent, the laser pointer will not illuminate. Additionally, the SR-600 Series will return
an error code (ERR20) if it receives a command while the laser pointer is active.
To quit the tuning, send TQUIT.
Send command : TQUIT
Response
: OK
Important
Upon receiving direct control commands in any mode other than operating mode (such as setting mode,
test mode or while switching devices), the SR-600 Series will reply with an error code (ERR**).
For more information on error codes, see the error code list on Page 7-11.
Setting Commands
Sending setting commands
There are four steps to sending the setting commands to the SR-600 series:
Send the command to switch the SR-600 Series to the setting mode (send "SSET")
The SR-600 Series enters the setting mode.
When the command is completed .......................OK is returned.
Send a change or confirm the desired setting command

When a command to change settings is sent
When the setting is completed successfully .......OK is returned.
When a setting error occurs.................................ERR** (**: Error code) is returned.
When a command to confirm settings is sent
When the command is completed successfully ..The current settings are returned.
When an error occurs ..........................................ERR** (**: Error code) is returned.
To save the settings into ROM, send the save command (SAVE).
Once the settings are stored in the ROM, the SR-600 Series starts with the changed settings from the next power-on.
When the command is completed successfully ..OK is returned.
When an error occurs ..........................................ERR** (**: Error code) is returned.
Send a command to switch the SR-600 Series back to the operation mode ("SEND" command).
When the command is completed successfully ..OK is returned.
When an incorrect command is sent ...................ERR** is returned.
7-16
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Setting command details

Initializing, saving, loading, and closing settings
Function
Send command
Response
Explanation
Error code
Set to save to ROM
SAVE
OK
ERR24
Start reading all of the program

codes
SETA
OK
ERR25
Initialize settings
DFLT
OK
The factory default settings will be restored.
ERR24
Specify and initialize a parameter

bank
BANKCLRmm
OK
mm = 00 to 16 parameter bank No.

"00" will initialize all parameter banks.
ERR04
ERR24
Delete a saved image
ICLRmm
OK
mm = 01 to 16: parameter bank No.
ERR04
ERR30
ERR24
Specify a parameter bank and start

SHOTmm
scanning
OK
mm = 01 to 16: parameter bank No.
ERR04
Quit the setting mode
OK
SEND
ERR20
Code setting
Important
This section explains the commands for "Code Setting 1" through "Code Setting 8".
When making these settings, be sure to send a "Code type" setting command before changing other settings.
When sending a new "Code type" setting, the other items in that code number will be reset to their
defaults. Be sure to change them back to the desired values.
The following table is divided into "Change" and "Check" commands:

Function
Send command
Response
Explanation
Error code
= 1 to 8 (Code setting 1 to 8)
= 00 to 16
00
Do not set
01
QR
02
DataMatrix
03
PDF417
04
MaxiCode
05
GS1 Databar
06
CODE39
07
ITF
08
Code 2of5
09
NW7(Codabar)
10
JAN/EAN/UPC
11
CODE128
12
COOP2of5(NEC 2of5)
13
CODE93
14
CC-A/C-B(GS1 Databar)
15
CC-A/C-B(JAN/EAN/UPC)
16
CC-A/C-B/CC-C(CODE128)
ERR02
ERR03
ERR06
m
nnnn
= 0001 to 7089
ERR02
ERR03
ERR06
m
nnnn
= 0001 to 7089
ERR02
ERR03
ERR06
m
nnnn
= 0001 to 2361
ERR02
ERR03
ERR06
m
nnnn
= 0001 to 2361
ERR02
ERR03
ERR06
m
nn
Change CODEm=nn
OK
Code type read with

code settings 1 to 8
Check
CODEm
Change MAXm=nnnn
mnn
OK
Maximum digits read

Check
MAXm
Change MINm=nnnn
mnnnn
OK
Minimum digits read

Check
MINm
Maximum digits read

for 2D codes when
composite character is
selected
Change MAXCm=nnnn
Minimum digits read for

2D codes when
composite character is
selected
Change MINCm=nnnn
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Check
Check
MAXCm
MINCm
mnnnn
OK
mnnnn
OK
mnnnn
7-17
Settings for 2D codes

Function
Send command
QR
Micro QR read setting
Change WCm57n
Conjugated QR
Conjugated QR read
setting
Change WCm58n
DataMatrix
Rectangular DataMatrix
Read settings
Change WCm59n
PDF417
Micro PDF417 Read
settings
Change WCm62n
Check
Check
Check
Check
RCm57
RCm58
RCm59
RCm62
Response
OK
Explanation
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
57n
OK
58n
OK
59n
OK
Error code
m
n
62n
GS1 Databar (RSS) settings

Function
Send command
GS1 Databar/GS1
Databar Truncated
reading
Change WCm63n
GS1 Databar Stacked/

GS1 Databar Stacked
Omnidirectional
reading
Change WCm64n
GS1 Databar Limited

reading
Change WCm65n
GS1 Databar Expanded

reading
Change WCm66n
GS1 Databar Expanded

Stacked reading
Change WCm67n
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
RCm63
RCm64
RCm65
RCm66
RCm67
Response
OK
Explanation
63n
OK
64n
OK
65n
OK
66n
OK
67n
Error code
CODE39 settings
Function
Send command
CODE39
Start/Stop character
transmission
Change WCm00n
CODE39
Check-digit [Modulus
43] inspection
Change WCm01n
CODE39
Send check-digit
Change WCm02n
CODE39
Trioptic CODE39
reading
Change WCm03n
CODE39
Short margin reading
Change WCm04n
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
RCm00
RCm01
RCm02
RCm03
RCm04
Response
OK
Explanation
00n
OK
01n
OK
02n
OK
03n
OK
04n
Error code
ITF settings
Function
7-18
Send command
ITF
Inspect check-digit
(Modulus 10/3)
Change WCm10n
ITF
Send
check-digit
Change WCm11n
ITF
Change WCm12n
Check
Check
Check
RCm10
RCm11
RCm12
Response
OK
Explanation
10n
OK
11n
OK
12n
Error code
SR-600-M-NO7-E
NW-7 (Codabar) settings

Function
Send command
NW-7
Start/stop character
transmission
Change WCm30n
NW-7
Change WCm31n
NW-7
Inspect check-digit
Change WCm32n
NW-7
Send check-digit
Change WCm33n
Check
Check
Check
Check
RCm30
RCm31
RCm32
RCm33
Change WCm34n
Response
OK
Explanation
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Lower-case character
1: Upper-case character
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Modulus 16
1: Modulus 11
2: Modulus 10/2 Weight
3: Modulus 10/3 Weight
4: Check DR
5: Weight modulus 11
6: Runes
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Output in 13 digits
1 Output in 12 digits
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
31n
OK
32n
OK
33n
OK
NW-7
Check-digit type
Check
NW-7
RCm34
Change WCm35n
Check
RCm35
34n
OK
35n
7
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
30n
OK
Error code
m
n
JAN/EAN/UPC (A / E) settings
Function
Send command
JAN/EAN/UPC
Reading UPC
Change WCm40n
JAN/EAN/UPC
Reading EAN/JAN8
Change WCm41n
JAN/EAN/UPC
Reading EAN/JAN13
Change WCm42n
JAN/EAN/UPC
Number of output digits
of UPC-A
Change WCm43n
JAN/EAN/UPC
Add the UPC-E system
code "0"
Change WCm44n
JAN/EAN/UPC
2-digit supplemental
reading
Change WCm68n
JAN/EAN/UPC
5-digit supplemental
reading
Change WCm69n
JAN/EAN/UPC
Ignore UPC without
supplemental
Change WCm70n
JAN/EAN/UPC
GTIN 14-digit output
Change WCm71n
JAN/EAN/UPC
Change WCm72n
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
RCm40
RCm41
RCm42
RCm43
RCm44
RCm68
RCm69
RCm70
RCm71
RCm72
Response
OK
Explanation
40n
OK
41n
OK
42n
OK
43n
OK
44n
OK
68n
OK
69n
OK
70n
OK
71n
OK
72n
Error code
1 CODE128, Code93 settings

Function
Send command
CODE128
GS1-128 compatibility
Change WCm51n
CODE128
Change WCm52n
CODE93
Change WCm53n
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Check
Check
Check
RCm51
RCm52
RCm53
Response
OK
Explanation
51n
OK
52n
OK
53n
Error code
7-19
Other code settings

Function
Send command
Change WCm54n
Response
OK
Read setting
Check
No. of codes to be read
with multi read function
Allow fewer detections
for multi read
RCm54
Change WCm55n
Check
RCm55
Change WCm50n
Check
RCm50
Width limit output

function setting
Change WCm83n
Width limit output limit

direction setting
Change WCm84n
Width limit output

length setting
Change WCm85nnnn
Width limit output start

digit setting
Change WCm86nnnn
Check
Check
Check
Check
RCm83
RCm84
RCm85
RCm86
Explanation
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 2 to 16
52 to 66 (read permission for the same details)
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Failed
1: Successful
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
n
= 0: Forward
1: Reverse
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
m
nnnn
= Output length
0000 to 7089
ERR02
ERR03
ERR06
m
nnnn
= Start digit
0000 to 7089
ERR02
ERR03
ERR06
54n
OK
55n
OK
50n
OK
83n
OK
84n
OK
85n
OK
Error code
m
n
86n
Operation settings
Function
Send command
Change WP12n
Response
OK
Explanation
n
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: At reading end
1: At trigger end
ERR02
ERR05
mm
= 01 to 16: Parameter bank No.
ERR02
ERR06
= 0: Parameter bank number order

1: Reading success bank priority
ERR02
ERR05
nnn
= 001 to 255
(Unit: 100 ms)
ERR02
ERR06
nn
= 00 to 99
(Unit: 10 ms)
ERR02
ERR06
mm
ERR02
ERR06
= 1 to 8
ERR02
ERR05
nnn
= 001 to 255
(Unit: 1 ms)
ERR02
ERR06
Reading mode
Check
Data transmission
trigger setting
Change WP13n
Alternate function
Change WP26mm
Alternate function
Alternate order setting
Change WP27n
Continuous reading
mode
Same code blocking
interval setting
Change WP41nnn
Continuous/bank
collection reading
mode
Laser-aimer blinking
duration setting
7-20
RP12
Check
Check
Check
Check
RP13
RP26
RP27
RP41
Change WP43nn
Check
RP43
In burst read mode

Parameter bank
numbers
Change WP19mm
In burst read mode

Burst count
Change WP20n
In burst read mode

Burst interval
Change WP21nnn
In burst read mode

Burst No. to be
saved in ROM
when reading fails
Change WP23bbbbbbbb
Appended data
function setting
Append code function
setting
Change WP17n
Appended data setting

Append symbol ID
setting
Change WP29n

Append parameter
bank number setting
Change WP84n

Append burst No.
setting
Change WP18n

Append read count
setting
Change WP11n
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
RP19
RP20
RP21
RP23
RP17
RP29
RP84
RP18
RP11
12n
OK
13n
OK
26mm
OK
27n
OK
Error code
= 0: Single label read mode

1: Continuous reading mode
2: Bank collection reading mode
3: Burst read mode
41nnn
OK
43nn
OK
19mm
OK
20n
OK
21nnn
OK
23bbbbbbbb
OK
= 0: Do not save
1: Save
Burst numbers 1 to 8 from left
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
17n
OK
29n
OK
84n
OK
18n
OK
11n
ERR02
ERR05
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Function
Send command
Change WP70n

Append code region
brightness setting
Change WP14n

Append position
measurement level
setting
Change WP91n

Append code vertex
coordinates setting
Change WP15n

Append code center
coordinates setting
Change WP16n

Append unused ECC
ratio setting
Change WP71n

Append PMI setting
Change WP86n

Preventative
maintenance
information (PMI)
Change WP48nnn

Preventative
maintenance
information (PMI)
Change WP49nnn

Preventative
maintenance
information (PMI)
Change WP58nnn

Preventative
maintenance
information (PMI)
Change WP59nnn
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
RP70
RP14
RP91
RP15
RP16
RP71
RP86
RP48
RP49
RP58
RP59
Change WP55hhh
Response
OK
Explanation
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Do not append
1: Append
ERR02
ERR05
nnn
= 000 to 100
ERR02
ERR06
nnn
= 000 to 100
ERR02
ERR06
nnn
= 000 to 100
ERR02
ERR06
nnn
= 000 to 100
ERR02
ERR06
hhh...
= Reading Error Codes

Up to 8 characters (16 HEX
characters) from HEX
0x00 to 0x7f
Example: Specifying "ERROR"
hhh...=4552524F52
= FF: Not set
ERR02
ERR07
70n
OK
14n
OK
91n
OK
15n
OK
16n
OK
71n
OK
86n
RP55
OK
48nnn
OK
49nnn
OK
58nnn
OK
59nnn
OK
Read error code setting

Check
Error code

Append reading time
setting
55hhh
hhh...
Read settings
The following table shows the items that can be set in parameter banks:
Function
Alternate setting
* When the code setting
is [Not selected], the
alternate setting is
ignored.
Send command
Change WTmm08n
Check
RTmm08
Change WTmm01n
Response
OK
RTmm01
OK
Change WTmm03nnn
Check
RTmm03
Change WTmm04nnnnn
RTmm04
Change WTmm19nnnnn
OK
OK
04nnnnn
OK
Gain
Check
RTmm19
Black-white reverse
read setting
Change WTmm05n
Right-left reverse read

setting
Change WTmm06n
Decode timeout
duration setting
Change WTmm07nnn
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Check
Check
Check
RTmm05
RTmm06
RTmm07
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
n

= 0 to 8: Code setting
0: Not set
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
nnn

= 003 to 333: Exposure time
Unit: 30s
ERR02
ERR04
ERR06
mm
nnnnn = 10000 to 40000: Sensitive
Unit: 625, 1250 when more than 20000
"10000" indicates the amplification by
"1.0000x".
ERR02
ERR04
ERR06
mm
nnnnn = 02500 to 37500: Gain
(Unit: 2500)
"10000" indicates the amplification by
"1.0000x".
ERR02
ERR04
ERR06
03nnn
Sensitive
Check

= 0 : Disable
1 : Enable
01n
Exposure time
19nnnnn
OK
mm
n

= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
n

= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
nnn

= 005 to 255: Decode Timeout length
(Unit: 10 ms)
ERR02
ERR04
ERR06
05n
OK
06n
OK
07nnn
Error code
mm
n
08n
Code setting
Check
Explanation
7-21
Function
Send command
Change WTmm09n
Response
OK
Capture delay time

Check
RTmm09
Internal bank retry

count
Change WTmm10nn
Average brightness
level during tuning
Change WTmm11nnn
Check
Check
RTmm10
RTmm11
Change WTmm12n
OK
10nn
OK
11nnn
OK
Check
RTmm12
Check
Change
RTmm13
WTmm14aaabbbc
ccddd
Decode range
Check
RTmm14
ERR02
ERR04
ERR06
mm
nn

= 00 to 32: Internal bank retry count
ERR02
ERR04
ERR06
mm
nnn

= 000 to 255: Average brightness value
ERR02
ERR04
ERR06
mm
n

= 0: Hi-Sensitive
1: Hi-SNR
2: Hi-DR
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
nnn

= 000 to 254: Offset
ERR02
ERR04
ERR06
12n
OK
Offset
13nnn
mm
aaa
= 000 to 650 (Even only): Decode range
bbb
= 000 to 378
ccc
= 101 to 751 (Odd only)
= 101 to 479
14aaabbb ddd
*
ccc-aaa
must be less than 100.
cccddd
ddd-bbb must be less than 100."
OK
mm
nn
Change WTmm16nn
RTmm16
ERR02
ERR04
ERR06
mm
n

= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
n

= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
n

= 0: Normal mode
1: Quality mode
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
n

= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
n

= 0 : Speed Priority
1: Normal
2: Quality priority
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
n

= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
n

= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
n

= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
mm
n

= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR04
ERR05
OK
Change WTmm17n
16nn
OK
Internal lighting
Check
RTmm17
Change WTmm18n
17n
OK
External lighting
Check
RTmm18
Change WTmm21n
18n
OK
QR Algorithm
Check
RTmm21
Change WTmm22n
21n
OK
QR Allow clumsy cell

Check
RTmm22
Change WTmm23n
22n
OK
DM Algorithm
Check
RTmm23
Change WTmm24n
23n
OK
DM Allow clumsy cell

Check
RTmm24
DM
Allow low contrast
Change WTmm25n
DM Allow poor
alignment
Change WTmm26n
Check
Check
RTmm25
RTmm26
Change WTmm27n
24n
OK
25n
OK
26n
OK
Allow low contrast

Check
7-22
RTmm27
27n
ERR02
ERR04
ERR11

= 00: Do not use filter
01: Expand (low)
02: Expand (medium)
03: Expand (high)
04: Expand (low) to shrink (low)
05: Expand (medium) to shrink (low)
06: Expand (high) to shrink (low)
07: Shrink (low)
08: Shrink (medium)
09: Shrink (high)
10: Shrink (low) to expand (low)
11: Shrink (medium) to expand (low)
12: Shrink (high) to expand (low)
Digial filter
Check
Error code

= 000 to 255: Capture delay time
(Unit: 1 ms)
09n
Dynamic range
Change WTmm13nnn
Explanation
mm
nnn
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Tuning settings
Function
Send command
Change WP97n
Response
Explanation
RP97
ERR02
ERR05
Change WP38nnn
nnn
= 003 to 333: Exposure time

Unit: 30s
ERR02
ERR06
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
2: Automatic
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: 100 ms
1: 200 ms
2: No limit
3: Use the specified value
ERR02
ERR05
nnn
= 005 to 255: Decode Timeout

(Unit: 10 ms)
ERR02
ERR06
nnn
= 000 to 254: Offset
ERR02
ERR06
aaa
= 000 to 650 (Even only): Decode range
bbb
= 000 to 378
ccc
= 101 to 751 (Odd only)
ddd
= 101 to 479
98aaabbb * ccc-aaa must be less than 100.
cccddd
ddd-bbb must be less than 100.
ERR02
ERR11
97n
OK
Exposure time
Check
RP38
Black-white reverse
read setting
Change WP81n
Right-left reverse read

setting
Change WP82n
Decode time-out limit

setting
Check
Check
RP81
RP82
Change WP87n
Check
RP87
Change WP90nnn
38nnn
OK
81n
OK
82n
OK
87n
OK
Decode time-out setting

Check
RP90
Change WP99nnn
90nnn
OK
Offset
Check
Change
RP99
WP98aaabbbcccd
dd
Decode range
Check
Digital filter use

setting
RP98
Change WP96n
Check
RP96
99nnn
OK
OK
= 0: Use the specified value

1: Expansion process
2: Contraction process
3: Dilate & Erode
ERR02
ERR05
= 00: Do not use filter

01: Expand (low)
02: Expand (medium)
03: Expand (high)
04: Expand (low) to shrink (low)
05: Expand (medium) to shrink (low)
06: Expand (high) to shrink (low)
07: Shrink (low)
08: Shrink (medium)
09: Shrink (high)
10: Shrink (low) to expand (low)
11: Shrink (medium) to expand (low)
12: Shrink (high) to expand (low)
ERR02
ERR06
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Level trigger
1: One-shot trigger
ERR02
ERR05
nnnn
= 0001 to 2550
(Unit: 10 ms)
ERR02
ERR06
hhh...
= Trigger on command
Up to 8 characters (16 HEX characters)
from <HEX0x00 to 0x7F>
ERR02
ERR07
hhh...
= Trigger off command

ERR02
ERR07
= 0: Do not start test mode

1: Reading rate test mode
2: Processing time test mode
3: Position test mode
ERR02
ERR05
96n
nn
Change WP01nn
OK
Digital filter
Check
RP01
Change WP36n
01nn
OK
Internal lighting
Check
RP36
Change WP37n
36n
OK
External lighting
Check
RP37
7
= 0: for Labels
1: Moving
2: Dot print
Tuning mode
Check
Error code
OK
37n
Trigger settings
Function
Send command
Change WP05n
Response
OK
Trigger type setting

Check
RP05
One-shot trigger
duration setting
Change WP42nnnn
Trigger on command
character setting
Change WP56hhh
Trigger off command

character setting
Change WP57hhh
Check
Check
Check
RP42
RP56
RP57
Change TESTn
Test mode initiated
upon power-up
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Check
TEST
Explanation
05n
OK
42nnnn
OK
56hhh
OK
57hhh
OK
TESTn
Error code
7-23
Communication settings
Function
Send command
Change WP35n
Baud rate setting
Data length setting

Parity check settings
* The type of parity is
set with the next
command.
Parity type settings
Stop bit length setting
Check
RP35
Change WP30n
Check
RP30
Change WP31n
Check
RP31
Change WP32n
Check
RP32
Change WP33n
Check
RP33
RTS/CTS protocol
setting
Change WP22n
RS-485 multi-drop link

settings
Change WP34n
RS-485 multi-drop link

ID number
Change WP44nn
Communication
protocol setting 1
Change WP07n
Communication
protocol setting 2
Change WP08n
Append checksum
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
RP22
RP34
RP44
RP07
RP08
Change WP39n
Check
RP39
Change WP51hhh
Header settings
Check
RP51
Response
OK
Explanation
n
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: 7 bit
1: 8 bit
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Even
1: Odd
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: 1 bit
1: 2 bit
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR05
nn
= 00 to 31: ID number
ERR02
ERR06
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: PASS/RTRY
1: ACK/NAK
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR05
hhh...
= Header
= FF: Not set
ERR02
ERR07
= Terminator
= FF: Not set
ERR02
ERR07
hh..
= 1 character (2 HEX characters) from

<HEX0x00 to 0x7F>
ERR02
ERR07
hh..
= Up to 5 characters (10 HEX characters)

= FF: Not set
ERR02
ERR07
hhh...
= Up to 5 characters (10 HEX characters)

= FF: Not set
ERR02
ERR07
nnn
= 000 to 999
ERR02
ERR06
hh..
= 1 character (2 HEX characters) from

<HEX0x00 to 0x7F>
ERR02
ERR07
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR05
= 0:Disable
1:Enable
ERR02
ERR05
35n
OK
30n
OK
31n
OK
32n
OK
33n
OK
22n
OK
34n
OK
44nn
OK
07n
OK
08n
OK
39n
OK
51hhh
hhh...
Change WP52hhh
Terminator settings
Check
RP52
OK
hhh...
52hhh
hhh...
Character settings
Delimiter character
settings
Change WP50hh
Character settings
Interval delimiter
settings
Change WP54hhh
Character settings
Composite delimiter
settings
Change WP60hhh
Output filling setting

Total size setting
Change WP69nnn
Output filling setting

Filling character setting
Change WP77hh
USB image output
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
RP50
RP54
RP60
RP69
RP77
Change WP61n
Check
RP61
Change WP73n
OK
50hh
OK
54hhh
OK
60hhh
OK
69nnn
OK
7-24
RP73
hhh...
hh..
77hh
OK
61n
OK
Format length
Check
Error code
= 0: 9600 bps
1: 19200 bps
2: 38400 bps
3: 57600 bps
4: 115200 bps
73n
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Terminal settings
Function
Send command
Response
Explanation
m
Change WIm00n
= 1: IN1
2: IN2
= 0: Disable
1: Reading rate test mode
2: Processing time test mode
3: Position test mode
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
= 1: IN1
2: IN2
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
= 1: IN1
2: IN2
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
= 0: 1 ms
1: 2 ms
2: 10 ms
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: N.O. (Normally open)

1: N.C. (Normally closed)
ERR02
ERR05
n
Check
RIm00
00n
m
Input terminal
Test mode settings
when start test mode is
assigned
Change WIm01n
Input terminal
Synchronization with IN
LED
Change WIm02n
Input terminal
Trigger input
at power-on
Change WIm21n
Input terminal
Input time constant
setting
Change WPm04n
Input terminal
Input polarity settings
Change WPm03n
OK
n
Check
Check
Check
Check
Check
RIm01
RIm02
RIm21
RPm04
RPm03
01n
OK
02n
OK
21n
OK
m
n
m
n
04n
OK
03n
m
Change WOm00nnnn
OK
Output terminal
Function assignment
Check
ROm00
Output terminal
Output ON duration
Change WP40nnn
Output terminal
BUSY output upon
power-up
Change WP80n
Output terminal
Output polarity of EXT.
LIGHT output
Change WP28n
SR-600-M-NO7-E
Check
Check
Check
RP40
RP80
RP28
00nnnn
OK
= 1: OUT1
2: OUT2
3: OUT3
4: OUT4
n
= 0: Not set
1: OK
2: NG
4: ERROR
8: PRESET
16: TUNING
32: TRG BUSY
64: USB BUSY
128: MODE BUSY
256: ERR BUSY
512: EXT.LIGHT
* "nnnn" is the total of the values of the items to be set.
7
ERR02
ERR03
ERR05
OK
Input terminal
Function assignment
Error code
= 1: IN1
2: IN2
= 0: Disable
1: Trigger input
2: Preset input
3: Start test mode
5: Start tuning
nn
= 001 to 255: Output ON duration

(Unit: 10 ms)
ERR02
ERR06
= 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: N.O. (Normally open)

1: N.C. (Normally closed)
ERR02
ERR05
40nnn
OK
80n
OK
28n
ERR02
ERR03
ERR06
7-25
Other settings
Function
Change WP24n
Verification/Preset
setting
Start digit setting
Change WP66nnnn
Verification/Preset
setting
Number of verification
digits setting
Change WP67nnn
Verification/Preset
setting
Incremental for
sequential value
verification setting
Change WP25snnnn
Verification/Preset
setting
Preset data registration
Send command
Verification/Preset
setting
Verification method
Check
Check
Check
Check
RP24n
RP66
RP67
RP25
Change WP68hhh...
Check
RP68
Change WP74n
Data output setting

in test mode
Change WP85n
Check
Check
RP74
RP85
Change WP75n
Display parameter bank

number during reading
setting
Save image location
setting
All settings command
Check
RP75
Change WP09n
Check
RP09
Change WP78n
Check
RP78
WA,
Change command 1,
command 2
Check
7-26
OK
Explanation
= 0: Constant
1: Auto increment
ERR02
ERR05
nnnn
= 0001 to 7089: Number of start digits
ERR02
ERR06
nnn
= 000 to 494: Number of verification digits
ERR02
ERR06
24n
OK
66nnnn
RA,
confirm command 1,
confirm command 2,
Error code
OK
67nnn
OK
25snnnn
OK
snnnn = -9999 to +9999
hhh...
ERR02
ERR07
= 0: Disable lock
1: Enable lock
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Disable output
1: Enable output
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Lock
1: Only emit in test mode
2: Only emit in operating mode
3: Allow by operation
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Disable display
1: Enable display
ERR02
ERR05
= 0: Disable saving
1: Save to RAM
2: Save to ROM
ERR02
ERR05
68hhh...
OK
74n
OK
85n
OK
75n
OK
09n
OK
78n
OK
Response
ERR02
ERR06
= Preset data
= FF: Not set
hhh...
TUNE button lock

setting
TUNE button laser

setting
Response
Command 1, Command 2
Separate the commands with a ','.
(Up to 992 characters)
ERR42
Response 1, Response 2
Responses will be returned separated by a ','."
SR-600-M-NO7-E
8
Field Network
Communication
8
This chapter describes how to connect an SR-600 Series device to a field

network via an NX-50 Series device.
8-1
8-2
SR-600-M-NO8-E
CC-Link Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

SR-600 Series Device Control Commands . . . . . . 8-12
8-1
8-1 CC-Link Control

This section explains how to control an NX-50CL from a PLC connected to a network via CC-link.
TIP
Refer to the manuals that came with the individual devices in question for more information about
subjects such as the CC-Link master unit and details about the PLC.
Operating on a System that Uses CC-Link

Note the following when operating an NX-50CL over a network that uses CC-Link:
The NX-50CL is a CC-Link Ver. 2.00 compatible network controller.

Use this device with a CC-Link Ver. 2.00 compatible master device.
CC-Link can connect up to 64 devices.
However, the number of units that can be controlled by a single unit may
be different.
One NX-50CL can control two or more units.
Refer to the user's manual for the CC-Link device you are using for information on calculating the
number of units controlled and the maximum number of connections.
The total cable length for CC-Link devices is 1.2 km (at 156 kb/s).
Refer to the following table for information on communication speeds and cable length.
Communication speed
Cable length between stations
Maximum overall cable length
Field Network Communication
156 kbit/s
1,200 m
625 kbit/s
900 m
2.5 Mbit/s
5 Mbit/s
10 Mbit/s
20 cm or more
400 m
160 m
100 m
Use CC-Link cables (version 1.10 or later) to connect the NX-50CL to other devices.
Make sure to connect the devices on either end of the CC-Link to a "Terminator" (110 ) in the DA-DB
interval.
When connecting an NX-50CL to a network, turn the terminator switch on.
Refer to
"NX-50CL" (Page 1-11) for more information on terminator switches.
8-2
SR-600-M-NO8-E
8-1 CC-Link Control
NX-50CL Settings
Use the AutoID Navigator software to set the NX-50CL to match the settings on the CC-Link master unit.
The section explains the CC-Link settings for the NX-50CL.
TIP
Refer to the "AutoID Navigator User's Manual" and the "NX-50 Series Operation Manual" for information
on other NX-50CL settings.
Refer to the user's manual of the CC-Link master device you are using for information on CC-Link
master unit settings.
CC-Link settings
Use the AutoID Navigator to set the following items.
8
Slave ID (No.)
Baud rate
: Set the ID number (unit number) of the NX-50CL. (1 to 63)

: Set this to match the baud rate of the master unit.
Select 156 K, 625 K, 2.5 M, 5 M or 10 M.
Station count, Expansion cyclic setting : Set this to match the type of data being read.
"Control size settings" Page 8-8
Once these settings are complete, send the settings to the NX-50CL.
TIP
The AutoID Navigator software can be used to save the NX-50CL settings as a CSP file.
Use this when registering the NX-50CL settings on the master unit.
One NX-50CL can control two or more units. The NX-50CL cannot be used to control only one unit.
SR-600-M-NO8-E
8-3
8-1 CC-Link Control
CC-Link Memory and Operations

NX-50CL devices connected over CC-Link operate as slave units (remote device units) for the CC-Link master unit.
The NX-50CL buffer memory is linked to the CC-Link master unit remote input/output and the remote register as
shown in the section "Memory configuration" below.
Use settings and programming (
"Setting and Programming" Page 8-7) under this memory configuration to
control SR-600 Series devices.
Memory configuration
NX-50CL buffer memory is linked as follows.
Slave
Mask
8
SR-600 Series
NX-50CL
Host PLC
CC-Link
Master unit
Buffer memory
CC-Link master unit
Read control buffer
A RY (Remote output)
Read data buffer
B RWw (Remote register)
Read buffer
Write control buffer
C RX (Remote input)
Write buffer
Write data buffer
8-4
D RWr (Remote register)
SR-600-M-NO8-E
8-1 CC-Link Control
A RY (Remote output)
RY (Remote output) is the control signal sent from the CC-Link master unit to the NX-50CL. This controls data
transmission between the NX-50CL Read/Write data buffers and CC-Link master unit RWw/RWr (remote registers)
as well as OUT 1 through 4.
NX-50CL
Signal
direction
Read control buffer

2 bytes (16 bits)
CC-Link master unit

RY (Remote output)
Signal name
Explanation
RY ( n + 0)
CMD_REQ
The command stored in RWw is sent when it

switches from off (0) to on (1).
The request ends when this reverts back to off (0).
RY ( n + 1)
DATA_LATCH
A request is sent for the NX-50CL to send data

when it switches from off (0) to on (1).
The request ends when this reverts back to off (0).
RY ( n + 2)
:
RY ( n + 7)
Reserved for the system
RY ( n + 8)
OUT1
Turns OUT1 on and off.*1
RY ( n + 9)
OUT2
ON 1
RY ( n + A)
OUT3
Turns OUT3 on and off*1
OFF 0
RY ( n + B)
OUT4
RY ( n + C)
:
RY ( n + F)
8
n : This varies with the unit number of the NX-50CL.

*1 : This is only valid when the output terminal condition is set by the NX-50CL output terminal settings on the bus
master.
B RWw (Remote register)

RWw (Remote register) stores "commands" from the CC-Link master unit to the NX-50CL.
NX-50CL
Signal
direction
Read data buffer
CC-Link master unit

RWw (Remote register)
Signal name
RWw ( n + 0)
CMD
Stores command names.
RWw ( n + 1)
PRM1
Stores parameters (bank numbers).
Explanation
C RX (Remote input)
RX (Remote input) reflects the state of the NX-50CL.
NX-50CL

2 bytes (16 bits)
Signal
direction
CC-Link master unit

RX (Remote input)
Signal name
Explanation
RX ( n + 0)
CMD_ACK
This is ON when a command has been handled

successfully.
RX ( n + 1)
CMD_NAK
This is ON when a command has been handled

unsuccessfully.
RX ( n + 2)
ERROR1
This is ON when a command error (command)

has occurred.
(This is cleared when a CMD_ACK reply is received.
RX ( n + 3)
ERROR2
This is ON when a command error (parameters)

has occurred.
(This is cleared when a CMD_ACK reply is received.
RX ( n + 4)
DATA_STROBE
This is ON when data transmission has finished.
RX ( n + 5)
DATA_VALID
This is ON when there is communication data.
RX ( n + 6)
HEAD
This displays the head ON: Connected.

connection state.
OFF: Not connected.
This is ON when OVER is received from the head.
RX ( n + 7)
OVER
RX ( n + 8)
OUT1
RX ( n + 9)
OUT2
RX ( n + A)
OUT3
RX ( n + B)
OUT4
RX ( n + C)
IN1
RX ( n + D)
IN2
RX ( n + E)
RX ( n + F)
This reflects the ON/OFF state of the terminal.
n : This varies with the unit number of the NX-50CL.

SR-600-M-NO8-E
8-5
8-1 CC-Link Control
D RWr (Remote register)

RX (Remote register) stores the operation results from the NX-50CL.
NX-50CL
Signal
direction
CC-Link master unit

RWr (Remote register)
Low-order
RWr ( n + 0)
High-order
RWr ( n + 1)
RWr ( n + 2)
RWr ( n + 3)
RWr ( n + 4)
:
RWr ( n + A)
RWr ( n + A + 1)
RWr ( n + A + 2)
RWr ( n + A + 3)
Write data
buffer
:
RWr ( n + B)
RWr ( n + B + 1)
RWr ( n + B + 2)
RWr ( n + B + 3)
:
RWr ( n + C)
RWr ( n + C + 1)
RWr ( n + C + 2)
RWr ( n + C + 3)
:
Low-order
High-order
Low-order
High-order
Low-order
High-order
Low-order
High-order
:
Low-order
High-order
Response code
Explanation
"00": Data obtained
"E9": DM memory over*1
Symbols read
[A] is the offset value of the first read data table.
[B] is the offset value of the second read data table.
[C] is the offset value of the third read data table.
:
First read data width
High-order
Data for the first digit
Low-order
Data for the second digit
High-order
Data for the third digit
Low-order
Data for the fourth digit
High-order
Data for the fifth digit
Low-order
Data for the sixth digit
:
Low-order
:
Second read data width in bank collection reading
High-order
mode
High-order
Data of the first digit
Low-order
Data of the second digit
High-order
Data of the third digit
Low-order
Data of the fourth digit
High-order
Data of the fifth digit
Low-order
Data of the sixth digit
:
Low-order
:
Third read data width in bank collection reading
High-order
mode
High-order
Data of the first digit
Low-order
Data of the second digit
High-order
Data of the third digit
Third symbol data in bank
Low-order
Data of the fourth digit
collection reading mode
High-order
Data of the fifth digit
Low-order
Data of the sixth digit
First symbol data
Second symbol data in

bank collection reading
mode
n : RWr numbers assigned by the master (This will change based on the number of NX-50CL units and the
number of other connected slave units.)
*1 Check that the settings under "Control size settings" on page 8-8 have been configured correctly.
8-6
SR-600-M-NO8-E
8-1 CC-Link Control
Setting and Programming

The following settings and programs are required to control an NX-50CL via CC-Link.
Communication condition
settings
Data size settings
Set the communication speed and slave ID (unit number) of the NX-50CL.
Calculate and set the data size needed for communication.

For the CC-Link master unit, set the link range for the NX-50CL.
"Data size settings" Page 8-7
Create a program based on the settings.
Ladder program
Use the handshake signal to create a program to send the commands sent
from the host PLC to the SR-600 Series and receive the operation results of
the commands.
Program initialization
8
Communication condition settings

The NX-50CL communication speed and slave ID (number) are set via the AutoID Navigator or by setting
commands.
AutoID Navigator
:
"CC-Link settings" Page 8-3.
Setting commands
"NX-50 Series Operations Manual" "Network (NX-50DN)", Page 5-13.
[Slave ID (No.)]
Set this to be the same as the Slave ID (number) assigned to the NX-50CL by the CC-Link.
[Baud rate]
Set this to the same speed as the baud rate (communication speed) set by CC-Link.
Refer to the user's manual of the CC-Link master device you are using for information on CC-Link master unit
settings.
Data size settings

Use the AutoID Navigator or setting commands to set the write size and read size of the memory linked via CCLink. Set "Stations" and "Expanded cycle."
AutoID Navigator
:
"CC-Link settings" Page 8-3.
Setting commands
Refer to
SR-600-M-NO8-E
"NX-50 Series Operations Manual" "Network (NX-50DN)", Page 5-13.
"Calculating size" (Page 8-8) for more information on calculating the necessary size.
8-7
8-1 CC-Link Control
Calculating size
The required memory size for an NX-50CL controlled via CC-Link is as follows.
Description
A Output control buffer
B Output data buffer
C Input control buffer
Size
Control data
2 bytes (16 bits)
Control command
2 bytes
Parameter
2 bytes
Control data
2 bytes (16 bits)
Response code
2 bytes
Symbols read
D Input data buffer
2 bytes
2 bytes or more
Data offset value
(This varies with the number of symbols read.)
Number of read data digits
2 bytes
The required size of the RWr (remote register) varies with the number of bar codes and 2D codes
read. Reserve an amount of space large enough to store a single handshake.
" D RWr (Remote register)" Page 8-6.
For more information on storage of read results, refer to
Control size settings
8
The control sizes for RX, RY, RWr and RWw are set as follows by changing the "Units" and "Expanded cycle"
settings. Select a combination of settings that will reserve a space of the proper size, as described above.
2 units
1x setting
2x setting
4x setting
8x setting
3 units
4 units
RX/RY ...............................64 bits
RX/RY............................... 96 bits
RX/RY ............................ 128 bits
RWw/RWr ......................16 bytes
RWw/RWr ...................... 24 bytes
RWw/RWr...................... 32 bytes
RX/RY ...............................95 bits
RX/RY............................. 160 bits
RX/RY ............................ 224 bits
RWw/RWr ......................32 bytes
RWw/RWr ...................... 48 bytes
RWw/RWr...................... 64 bytes
RX/RY .............................192 bits
RX/RY............................. 320 bits
RX/RY ............................ 448 bits
RWw/RWr ......................64 bytes
RWw/RWr ...................... 96 bytes
RWw/RWr.................... 128 bytes
RX/RY .............................384 bits
RX/RY............................. 640 bits
RX/RY ............................ 896 bits
RWw/RWr ....................128 bytes
RWw/RWr .................... 192 bytes
RWw/RWr.................... 256 bytes
* The NX-50CL input data buffer requires a minimum of 12 bytes, so 1 unit cannot be set.
Example of memory assignments

This example assumes the following settings.
Memory assignments
This example assumes the following memory assignments for the CC-Link master unit.
RX (Remote input) refresh device
: X1000
RWw (Remote register) refresh device
: D1000
RY (Remote output) refresh device
: Y1000
RWr (Remote register) refresh device
: D2000
Command operation
The following commands are used.
T1 command ......................... Turns on the trigger on command.
Parameter (0000)................... Used with the alternate function.
8-8
SR-600-M-NO8-E
8-1 CC-Link Control
z Data buffer size

Output data buffer
Command communication requires 2 words of data size.
The assignment for a T1 command is as follows.
Device
Description
Data format
D1000
$5431
$5431="T1"
ASCII
D1001
$0000
Execute alternate function
Binary
Input data buffer

" D RWr (Remote register)" Page 8-6.
The size required for reading out operation results can be found in
For example, to read one 10-row QR code, the following would be stored in the input data buffer. The input
data buffer would therefore need to be at least 9 words.
Device
Description
Data format
D2000
$3030
Response code ($3030 = "00")
ASCII
D2001
$0001
Symbols read
Binary
D2002
$0003
Read data table offset value
Binary
D2003
$0010
Read data width
Binary
1st and 2nd digits of data
ASCII
D2005
3rd and 4th digits of data
ASCII
D2006
5th and 6th digits of data
ASCII
D2007
ASCII
D2008
ASCII
The sizes of the input and output control buffers are 16 points, including the section reserved for the system.
Read control buffer

Read data buffer
Write data buffer
CC-Link master
Communication
direction
NX-50CL
Device
RY
Read buffer
RWw
Write buffer
Description
Y1000 to Y100F
D1000, D1001
Remote output
Remote register
RX
X1000 to X100F
Remote input
RWr
D2000 to D2008
Remote register
Input control
Device
SR-600-M-NO8-E
Signal name
X1000
CMD_ACK
X1001
X1002
Output control
Device
Signal name
Y1000
CMD_REQ
CMD_NAK
Y1001
DATA_LATCH
ERROR1
Y1002
X1003
ERROR2
Y1003
X1004
DATA_STROBE
Y1004
Reserved for the
X1005
DATA_VALID
Y1005
system
X1006
HEAD
Y1006
X1007
OVER
Y1007
X1008
OUT1
Y1008
OUT1
X1009
OUT2
Y1009
OUT2
X100A
OUT3
Y100A
OUT3
X100B
OUT4
Y100B
OUT4
X100C
IN1
Y100C
X100D
IN2
Y100D
Reserved for the
X100E
Reserved for the
Y100E
system
X100F
system
Y100F
8-9
D2004
8-1 CC-Link Control
Creating ladder programs

Set "Send commands" and "Receive operation results" on the PLC by following these steps.
Store the command to be sent in the RWw (remote register) of the CC-Link master station.
Store "Command" and "Parameters" in RWr (remote register).
TIP
Refer to the following for storage format and storage address.

Storage address:
Storage format:
"Memory configuration" - " B RWw" Page 8-5

"8-2 SR-600 Series Device Control Commands" Page 8-12
Send the command.

Turn the RY (remote output) "CMD_REQ" (command execution request) from OFF to ON.
When "CMD_REQ" turns on, the command stored in step 1 will be sent to the NX-50CL.
"Memory configuration" - " A RY (Remote output)" Page 8-5
Confirm that the command was sent.
When the NX-50CL receives the command, the RX (remote input) "CMD_ACK" will turn ON.
"Memory configuration" - " C RX (Remote input)" Page 8-5
When "CMD_ACK" turns ON, turn the RY (remote output) "CMD_REQ" OFF.
When the NX-50CL receives the command and the results are stored in buffer memory, the RX (remote
input) "DATA_VALID" will turn ON.
"Memory configuration" - " C RX (Remote input)" Page 8-5
Receive the execution results.
Turn the RY (remote output) "DATA_LATCH" from OFF to ON.

Turning "DATA_LATCH" ON causes the execution results to be sent to RWr (remote register).
SR Series: "Memory configuration" - " D RWr (Remote register) Page 8-6
When the NX-50CL has sent the execution results, the RX (remote input) "DATA_STROBE" will turn
ON.
When "DATA_STROBE" turns ON, turn the RY (remote output) "DATA_LATCH" OFF.
8-10
SR-600-M-NO8-E
8-1 CC-Link Control
Timing Chart
PASS/RTRY
When the CC-Link master unit "DATA_LATCH" turns off, the NX-50CL sends PASS to the head.
Master (Remote output)
CMD_REQ
DATA_LATCH
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Master (Remote input)

CMD_ACK
DATA_VALID
DATA_STO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
DATA
D1
D2
D3
Head
SD
RD
D1
D2
D3
No Handshaking
Master (Remote output)
ON
CMD_REQ OFF
ON
DATA_LATCH OFF
Master (Remote input)
ON
CMD_ACK OFF
ON
DATA_VALID OFF
ON
DATA_STO OFF
DATA
D2
D3
D4
Head
SD
RD
Important
SR-600-M-NO8-E
D1 D2 D3
D4
The NX-50CL can store up to two data transmissions from an SR-600 Series device. Thus, if there
have been three transmissions from an SR-600 Series device when you are sending data from the
CC-Link master station, the first transmission will be deleted so that the new data will fit in the buffer.
Do not set the head to the PASS/RTRY protocol.
The NX-50CL does not have exclusive control over sending commands to SR-600 Series devices nor
over hard trigger input. Thus it is possible that sent commands sent to an SR-600 Series device will be
ignored if a hard trigger is received before the command is confirmed.
8-11
8-2 SR-600 Series Device Control Commands

This section lists the commands needed to control SR-600 devices via CC-Link.
SR Series Device Control Commands

Use the table below to send commands to control the SR-600 Series.
Process details
Command
Parameter 1
(2-byte ASCII)
(Binary)
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Trigger on command
T1
m
m = 0000 to 0016*1
Trigger off command
T0
Preset trigger ON
P1
Preset trigger OFF
P0
Clear buffers
XC
*1 : m is the parameter bank number.

Set m to 0000 when using the alternate function.
8
8-12
SR-600-M-NO8-E
9
Ethernet Communication
This chapter describes Ethernet communication using the SR-600 Series and
N-L1.
9
9-1
9-2
9-3
SR-600-M-NO9-E
Overview of the N-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Setting the N-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Troubleshooting the N-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9-1
9-1 Overview of the N-L1

The N-L1 is a communication unit used to transfer the read data sent from the SR-600 Series to a
personal computer or PLC via Ethernet. This section describes the basic specifications and functions
of the N-L1.
Basic Specifications
Connection
Connector type: RJ-45
The pin arrangement of the Ethernet connector port is as follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Pin number
Name
Signal name
Signal direction
(1)
TX+
Send signal +
Output
(2)
TX
Send signal -
Output
(3)
RX+
Receive signal +
Input
(4)
Not used
(5)
Not used
(6)
RX
Receive signal -
Input
(7)
Not used
(8)
Not used
Use a "straight cable" to connect the N-L1 to a hub; and use a "cross cable" to connect the N-L1 to a personal
computer.
Hub
Straight cable
Cross cable
PC
Use a cable rated Category 5 or higher. (Both STP and UTP can be used)
The extended length must not exceed 100 m.
CAUTION
The N-L1 does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet).

Be sure to connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power supply terminal of the N-L1.
Ethernet specifications
Automatic recognition of 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Handshaking: TCP/IP, ICMP (ping), telnet (setting)
TCP specifications
No. of connections which can be established simultaneously: 1 connection
Both server and client operations supported
9-2
SR-600-M-NO9-E
9-2 Setting the N-L1

Setting Procedure
Before using the N-L1, you need to register the device connected to the N-L1, configure the Ethernet connection,
and set the parameters used for communication with the SR-600 Series.
Use the AutoID Navigator software for configuration.
The communication with the N-L1 uses port 23 (telnet connection).
Preparation
Make the following adjustments before you begin to configure the N-L1.
Setting the N-L1

The settings of the N-L1 can be changed with the RESET/RUN switch.
The RESET/RUN switch must be operated while the N-L1 is turned off.
RESET setting
Ensure that the N-L1 is turned off and set the RESET/RUN switch to the RESET side.
When the N-L1 is turned on with this switch setting, it operates with the factory default values.
9
Factory default values of the N-L1

IP address
192.168.0.1
Subnet mask
255.255.255.0
When configuration is completed, turn off the N-L1, set the RESET/RUN switch to the RUN side, and turn on the NL1 again. The settings are applied to the N-L1.
RUN setting
For normal operation, use the N-L1 in RUN mode.
Connecting to AutoID Navigator

Use AutoID Navigator to configure the N-L1.
1
2
On the initial screen of AutoID Navigator, double-click [N-L1] shown in the [Others] category.
Select [N-L1] from [System configuration]. Then select the device connected to the N-L1.
SR-600-M-NO9-E
9-3
Click the
[Option] button to set communication parameters.
9
RESET setting
: Establish communication by using the factory default values of the N-L1.
RUN setting
: Establish communication by using the configured values on the [Ethernet connection] tab of
Manual setting
: Enter the communication parameters manually.
the N-L1.
Update the connection to establish communication with the N-L1.

Ensure that the N-L1 is connected, and click the
[Update connection] button to update the connection.
Change the device settings and send/receive data.

Refer to the section describing the AutoID Navigator operation.
(
9-4
Chapter 5 AutoID Navigator Functions and Operation)
SR-600-M-NO9-E
N-L1 Registered List

Register the device connected to the N-L1.
9
(1) N-L1 registered list

The devices connected to the N-L1 are listed.
The list contains the following items.
By clicking the item name [Device name] or [IP address], you can sort the list by that item.
Device name
: The device connected to the N-L1 is displayed.
IP address
: IP addresses are displayed.
Subnet mask
: Subnet masks are displayed.
Default gateway
: Default gateways are displayed.
Port number
: Port numbers are displayed.
(2) Local network settings
This list shows the settings of the networks in which the AutoID Navigator is operating.
SR-600-M-NO9-E
9-5
Ethernet Settings
Perform N-L1 Ethernet communication setting.
(1)
(2)
(3)
9
(1) Basic settings

Perform N-L1 Ethernet communication setting
IP address
: Register IP address.
Subnet mask
: Register subnet mask.
Default gateway
: Register default gateway.
Port number
: Register port number.
Password
: Set the password for telnet connection. (Default: RAS)
MAC address
: When the setting is received, the MAC address of the N-L1 will be displayed.
Important
Port number 23 cannot be used (during configuration transmission) because it is reserved for setup
communication. Select another port number.
(2) Operation setting

The N-L1 supports both server and client operations. The factory default settings do not specify the destination
of a connection. To use the N-L1 as a client, you need to send setting commands to register the port number
and IP address of the device to be connected as the setting of the N-L1.
Establish connection request
Set the timing at which the N-L1 requests a connection, when used as a client.
Normally, select [Disable].
Enable
: Request a connection as necessary when no connection has been established, such as
immediately after the N-L1 is turned on.
Disable
: Request a connection only when read data arrives from the SR-600 Series.
Destination device setting
IP address
: Set the IP address of the device to be connected.
Port No.
: Set the port number of the device to be connected.
Note
9-6
When [Connection request] is set to [Enable], the AutoID Navigator cannot update the connection.
SR-600-M-NO9-E
(3) Keep Alive function and Idle function

Select the operation when the status of no TCP communication continues for a specified period. There are three
options as shown below.
Set the period of no communication with the monitor timer. (1 to 60 minutes)
Normally, use the Keep Alive function (No communication period: 1 minute).
Use keep alive : When the specified period elapses, a Keep command is sent to confirm a connection.
Use idle timer : When the specified period elapses, the communication is disconnected without
confirmation.
Not use
: The period of no connection is not monitored.
RS-232C Setting
Set the parameters used for the communication between the N-L1 and SR-600 Series.
Be sure that the communication parameters of the N-L1 are the same as those of the SR-600 Series.
9
Baud rate
Parity
Data length
Stop bit length
TCP transmission timing
RTS/CTS control
Important
SR-600-M-NO9-E
:
:
:
:
:
:
Set the baud rate.

Set the parity.
Select the data length.
Set the stop bit length.
Set the interval at which the N-L1 sends data.
Select whether to use the RTS/CTS control. Select [Enable].
Even if the data transmission timing has not been reached, data will be sent when the data in the TCP
transmission buffer reaches the maximum transmission size (256 bytes).
When the RTS/CTS control is set to [Disable], the communication may not be stable due to data
collision during communication. Be sure to set the option to [Enable].
9-7
Setting the N-L1

Telnet connection
Start a telnet application to set the N-L1.
The typical methods to establish a telnet connection are as follows:
Command prompt
HyperTerminal
TeraTerm
This section describes the method to establish connection by using a command prompt.
Start a command prompt and establish telnet connection with the N-L1.
Command
: telnet 192.168.0.1
9
When the telnet connection is successfully established, a password prompt appears. Enter the following
password.
Password
Note
9-8
: RAS (half-width upper-case characters)
The password you typed ("RAS") is not shown on the command prompt screen.
When you have logged in successfully, a message similar to the following is displayed.
SR-600-M-NO9-E
Enter the setting values.

For example, to change the IP address of the N-L1 to "192.168.0.100", type the following.
Command
: l_ip=192.168.0.100
Response
: OK
"Setting Command List" (Page 9-11)
To save the settings in the N-L1, send a "save" command.

Command
Response
: save
: OK
Note
When the save command is sent, the settings are saved in the EEPROM.
It may take one or two seconds before you receive the OK response after the save command is sent.
To finish the setting, type "exit" and terminate the telnet connection.
This completes the setting of the N-L1.

Turn off the N-L1, set the RESET/RUN switch to RUN, and turn on the unit again. The N-L1 starts up with the new
settings.
SR-600-M-NO9-E
9-9
CAUTION
After the setting has been changed, users can still change the setting through the telnet
connection using the new IP address.
If you forget the new IP address, you can reset the N-L1 to the factory setting by turning off the
unit, setting the RESET/RUN switch to RESET, and then turning on the unit. Set the N-L1 again
from the beginning.
If no entry is made for 60 seconds after the password has been entered, the telnet connection
will be disconnected. When this occurs, you need to establish the telnet connection again.
Checking the connection of the N-L1

Check that the N-L1, which you have changed the settings on, can connect properly to the PC.
Send a "ping" command to the N-L1 according to the following example.
Example:
To send a ping command to the N-L1 of which you changed the IP address to "192.168.0.100"
Command
: ping 192.168.0.100
9
When connection is successfully established, a response screen similar to the one above appears.
9-10
SR-600-M-NO9-E
Setting Command List

The following is a list of the commands used to set the N-L1.
To use the setting commands to configure the N-L1, you need to establish a telnet connection with the N-L1 by using
a command prompt or HyperTerminal.
Ethernet-related settings
Function
Send command
Change
N-L1 IP address
setting
l_ip = a.b.c.d
OK
l_ip
a.b.c.d
mask = n
OK
mask
gwip = a.b.c.d
OK
gwip
a.b.c.d
Confirm
Change
Subnet mask settings
Response
Confirm
Change
Default gateway
settings
Confirm
Change
Confirm
Change
Connected device
IP address setting
l_pt = n
OK
l_pt
f_ip = a.b.c.d
OK
f_ip
a.b.c.d
Confirm
Connected device
port number setting
Change f_pt = n
OK
Confirm f_pt
Send establish
connection request as
necessary
Change conn = n
OK
Keep Alive function

setting
Idle function settings

Wireless monitor timer
settings
SR-600-M-NO9-E
Confirm conn
Change keep = n
OK
Confirm keep
Change idle = n
OK
Confirm idle
Change timr = n
OK
Confirm timr
n = 0 to 31
*Specify the value as bit length.
255.255.255.0=24
255.255.0.0=16
255.0.0.0=8
Default
a.b.c.d =
192.168.0.1
n = 24
a.b.c.d = Default gateway

address
a: 0 to 255
b: 0 to 255
c: 0 to 255
d: 0 to 255
a.b.c.d =
0.0.0.0
n = 0 to 65535
*Do not specify port number 23
because it is used for the telnet
connection.
n = 9004
a.b.c.d = IP address of the host

a: 0 to 255
b: 0 to 255
c: 0 to 255
d: 0 to 255
a.b.c.d =
0.0.0.0
n = 0 to 65535
n = 9004
n = 0, 1
0: Disable
1 : Enable
n=0
n = 0, 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
n=0
n = 0, 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
n=0
n = 1 to 60 (Unit: 1 min.)
Port number of the

N-L1 setting
Explanation
a.b.c.d = IP address
a: 0 to 255
b: 0 to 255
c: 0 to 255
d: 0 to 255
n = 60
9-11
RS-232C-related settings
Function
Send command
Change
RTS/CTS
handshaking setting
Response
mode = n
OK
mode
bps = n
OK
Confirm
Change
Baud rate setting
Confirm
bps
Data length setting
Change bits = n
OK
Confirm bits
Change
Parity enable/disable
setting
Stop bit length setting
TCP transmission
timing settings
Confirm
pari = n
OK
pari
Change stop = n
OK
Confirm stop
Change timv = n
OK
Confirm timv
Explanation
Default
n = 0, 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
*When connecting the SR-600 Series,
be sure to enable this protocol.
n=0
n = 13 to 19
13: 4800
15: 9600
16: 19200
17: 38400
18: 57600
19: 115200
n = 15
n = 7, 8
7: 7 bits
8: 8 bits
n=8
n = 0, 1, 2
0: None
1: Even
2: Odd
n=0
n = 0, 1
0: 1 bits
1: 2 bits
n=0
n = 1 to 100 (Unit: ms)
n = 100
Other settings
Function
Send command
Change
Explanation
Default
aaaaaaaa: 8 bytes or less

*You can change the password which
should be confirmed after the telnet
connection.
OK
psw
aaaaaaaa
Check MAC address settings
madr
OK
The MAC address of the N-L1 is

displayed.
Reset setting data
reset
OK
Reset the specified settings.

*The setting values saved in the EEPROM
are not reset.
Save settings
save
OK
The specified settings are saved in the

EEPROM.
Send ping to the connected

device
Ping
Time_out
Ping the connected device that had its IP
Reply_Recv=a address set with f_ip. (4 times)
aa.bbb.ccc.
Interval_time = 3 seconds
Time out = 5 seconds
ddd
Complete setting
(No response)
OK
Change/check
password settings
9-12
Response
pswaaaaaaaa
Confirm
RAS
SR-600-M-NO9-E
9-3 Troubleshooting the N-L1

This section lists the possible problems you may encounter during the use of the N-L1 and their countermeasures.
Communication fails.
Check the Ethernet communication status between the N-L1 and the connected device.
Check that the LAN cable is connected properly.
You must use a cross cable to directly connect the N-L1 to a personal computer. Ensure that a straight cable is not
used.
To check the network path to the connected device and the network configuration, connect to the N-L1 with telnet,
send the "ping" command and check the response. When Time_out is returned, check that the IP address of the
device connected with the N-L1 and the IP address set to the N-L1 are the same.
To confirm the network route to the N-L1, send "ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" ("XXX" is the IP address set in the N-L1)
from the PC and check the response. If you are not certain of the IP address of the N-L1, turn off the N-L1, set the
RUN/RESET switch of the N-L1 to RESET, and then turn on the N-L1 again. Use the factory default IP address.
Check the communication between the SR-600 Series and the N-L1.
Read a code with the SR-600 Series and confirm that the communication status LED of the N-L1 flashes. If the
LED does not flash, confirm that the communication settings of the SR-600 Series and N-L1 are the same.
Important
When connecting the SR-600 Series to the N-L1, be sure to set the RTS/CTS protocol setting of the SR600 Series to "Enable".
Does not turn on.

Confirm that the power LED of the N-L1 is lit. If it is not lit, check that the 24 VDC power supply cable is properly
connected.
SR-600-M-NO9-E
Important
The N-L1 does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet). Be sure to connect a 24 VDC power supply to
the power supply terminal of the N-L1.
9-13
9-3 Troubleshooting the N-L1
9
9-14
SR-600-M-NO9-E
Appendix
This chapter describes the specifications for the device, the read
characteristics, the external dimensions, and general troubleshooting
procedures.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
SR-600-M-NOA-E
SR-600 Series Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

N-R2/R4/UB/L1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
NX-50CL Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
SR-600 Series Field of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Checksum Calculation Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
ASCII Code List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Configuration Record List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Factory Default Setting List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A-1
SR-600 Series Specifications
General Specifications
Laser
pointer
Lighting
Model
Type
Light source
Output
Pulse width
Laser class
Light source
LED class
Supported
code
Barcode
2D Code
Focal distance
Barcode
2D Code
Reading time
(typical examples)
Minimum
resolution
Reading
DataMatrix
Appendix
Reading
distance
(typical
examples)
QR
Barcode
Reading view range

(focal distance)
Control input
Control output
Input/
output
Environment
resistance
Communication
method
Transmission
speed
Synchronization
method
RS-232C
Data bit
length
Stop bit
length
Parity check
USB
Enclosure rating
Ambient temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
Ambient luminance
Operating environment
Vibration
Rating
Power supply voltage

Current consumption
Weight
SR-600
Short-range
SR-610
SR-600HA
Mid-range
High resolution
Visible semiconductor laser (660 nm)
90 W
200 s
Class 1 (IEC60825-1, FDA CDRH Part 1040.10)
High intensity red LED
Class 1 (IEC60825-1)
Code 39, ITF, Industrial 2of5, COOP 2of5,
NW-7 (Codabar), Code 128, GS1-128 (EAN-128),
---GS1-DataBar (RSS), Code 93, JAN/EAN/UPC,
Trioptic Code 39
QR, MicroQR, DataMatrix, PDF417, MicroPDF, MaxiCode,
GS1-Composite
60 mm
100 mm
38 mm
0.127 mm
0.127 mm
---0.127 mm
0.25 mm
0.082 mm
21 ms (focal distance, QR code 21 x 21)
35 to 95 mm
(Cell size 0.339 mm)
31 to 97 mm
29 to 106 mm
(Narrow bar width
0.339 mm)
40 to 173 mm
35 to 188 mm
44 to 205 mm
(Narrow bar width
0.508 mm)
19 to 51 mm
17 to 54 mm
42.5 mm x 27.1 mm
70.6 mm x 45.0 mm
26.6 mm x 17.0 mm
----
2 non-voltage inputs (IN1, IN2)

4 NPN open collector outputs (OUT1 to OUT4)
30 mA max. (24 V or less)
Residual voltage 0.8 V or less, leakage current 0.1 mA or less
RS-232C standards
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bit/s
Asynchronous
7/8 bits
1/2 bits
None/Even/Odd
Full-speed USB 2.0 interface
IP65
0 to +45C
-10 to +50C
35 to 95% RH (No condensation)
Sunlight: 10,000lx, incandescent lamp: 6,000lx, fluorescent lamp: 2,000lx
Location without dust or corrosive gas
10 to 55 Hz: double amplitude, 1.5 mm in the X, Y and Z directions,
3 hours respectively.
5 VDC +5%, -10%
630 mA or less
Approx. 160 g (including the cable) *Approx. 27 g without the cable
* Use the Limited Power Source defined in UL/IEC60950-1 to comply with UL/IEC60950-1.
A-2
SR-600-M-NOA-E
1 SR-600 Series Specifications
Reading Range Characteristics (Typical)

SR-600
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Reading distance
(mm)
40
30
20
10
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
Unit:mm
Code type
2D code
Composite character
QR
0.25
48
DataMatrix
DataMatrix
0.127
36
48
74
85
71
0.25
38
84
CC-A
0.25
31
89
CODE39
0.127
42
76
CODE39
0.25
30
95
CODE128
0.25
27
96
GS1 Databar
0.25
37
97
Appendix
Bar code
QR
Cell size (*)

0.127
* Narrow bar width for bar codes
SR-610
0
50
100
150
200
Reading distance
(mm)
75
50
25
0
-25
-50
-75
Unit:mm
Code type
2D code
Composite character
Bar code
QR
Cell size (*)

0.25
QR
0.5
58
DataMatrix
DataMatrix
0.25
35
62
135
188
135
0.5
40
173
CC-A
0.25
51
142
CODE39
0.25
45
158
CODE39
0.5
44
205
CODE128
0.25
41
154
GS1 Databar
0.25
48
160
* Narrow bar width for bar codes

SR-600-M-NOA-E
A-3
1 SR-600 Series Specifications
SR-600HA
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Reading distance
(mm)
70
25
20
15
10
5
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
A
-25
Unit:mm
Code type
2D code
QR
Cell size
0.08
QR
0.127
28
QR
DataMatrix
0.25
24
17
40
45
54
0.08
28
39
DataMatrix
0.127
24
45
DataMatrix
0.25
19
51
Appendix
A-4
SR-600-M-NOA-E
N-R2/R4/UB/L1 Specifications
General specifications
Model
Power supply for barcode
reader
N-R2
N-R4
N-UB
N-L1
5 VDC 5%, (650 mA)
LED x 9
(Power supply status, data transmission/ reception status, I/O
terminal status)
Display
Terminating resistance
Ambient
temperature
Ambient storage
Environmental temperature
Relative humidity
resistance
Operating
environment
Vibration
Power voltage
Rating
Current
consumption
Weight
100
LED x 11
Power supply status,
data send/receive
status, I/O terminal
status LINK status,
communication speed)
-
0 to 50C
-20 to 60C
35% to 85% (No condensation)
No dust or corrosive gas
10 to 55 Hz Amplitude 1.5 mm, 2 hours for X, Y, and Z axes.
24 VDC (+10%, -20%)
380 mA or less
Approx. 135 g
Approx. 135 g
(Excluding the
connector)
N-R2
N-R4
Approx. 155 g
Output
Terminal block
Model
Points
Input type
Maximum rated
input
Minimum ON
voltage
Maximum OFF
current
Points
Output type
Rated output load
Leakage current
when OFF
Residual voltage
when ON
N-UB
2 (IN1, IN2)
Bidirectional voltage input
N-L1
Appendix
Input
I/O specifications
26.4 VDC
15 VDC
1 mA
4 (OUT1 to 4)
Photo MOS relay output
30 VDC, 100 mA
0.1 mA or less
1 V or less
Communication specifications
Head
interface
Model
Connector
Communication
standard
Communication
speed
Data bit length
Parity check
Stop bit length
Flow control
Connector
Host
interface
Communication
standard
Total
communication
cable length
SR-600-M-NOA-E
N-R2
N-R4
N-UB
1 (12-pin round connector)
N-L1
RS-232C compliance
4800, 9600, 19200, 31250, 38400, 57600,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
115200 bits/s
bits/s
7/8 bit
None/Even/Odd
1/2 bit
Hardware/software/none selectable
Hardware flow control (Required)
1 (D-sub 9pin
1 (removable 5-pin
1 (USB - Type B)
1 (RJ-45)
connector)
connector)
RS-422A/RS-485
IEEEB02.3 compliant
USB 2.0 (Full-Speed
(Maximum
RS-232C compliance
10BASE-T/100BASE12 Mbps)
connectable units:
TX
31) Switchable
15 m or less
(including the head
1.2 km or less
5 m or less
100 m or less
cable)
A-5
NX-50CL Specifications
General specifications
Model
Main functions
NX-50CL
Relay function (control, data), status display function, head test function
7-segment LED in 3 digits
(for functions including ID display, setting display, status display)
Display
LED (head access status display, head output status display, network status)
Terminating resistance (TERMINATOR)
Ambient temperature
Environmental
resistance
Relative humidity
Operating
environment
Vibration
Power voltage
Rating
Current consumption
Compliant
standards
EMC
Safety standards
Weight
100
0C to +55C
35% to 85% (No condensation)
No dust or corrosive gas
10 to 55Hz Amplitude 0.3 mm55 Hz to 500 Hz Acceleration 2G
24 VDC +5%/-10%
500 mA max. (varies depending on the head being connected)
EN61326 class A (Europe), FCC Part 15B class A (America),
ICES-003 class A (Canada)
UL508 (USA), CAN/CSA22 No. 14 (Canada)
Approx 300 g (including network connector)
I/O specifications
Model
Points
Function
Input
Input type
Voltage input 24 VDC
Appendix
26.4 VDC
Minimum ON voltage
15 VDC
Points
Function
Output type
Output Rated output load
Leakage current when
OFF
Residual voltage
when ON
A-6
Control input (trigger/timing, preset), remote I/O input
Maximum rated input

Maximum OFF current
Terminal
block
NX-50CL
2 each for NPN side and PNP side (NPN and PNP share a circuit)
1 mA
4 outputs each on NPN and PNP sides
Judgment output (OK, NG), error output (ERR), control output (ENB),
remote I/O output
NPN side: NPN open collector; PNP side: PNP open collector
30 VDC, 100 mA or less
0.1 mA or less
1 V or less
SR-600-M-NOA-E
3 NX-50CL Specifications
Communication specifications
Model
Points
Function
Network standard
Master unit certified by CLPA (CC-Link Version 2.00)
Total communication
cable length
1.2 km or less (depending on communication speed)
Device type
connection
Transmission
method (Physical
layer)
Remote device station

Half-duplex (RS-485 compliant) Broadcast polling
-
Stop bit length
Parity Check
2 to 4 stations
Rated power
Current
consumption
Points
connection
Connectable models
Total extension
length
Points
Function
1 (12-pin round connector)

RS-232C compliance
BL-1300, BL-180, BL-500, BL-600, BL-700, BL-210RK, SR-500, SR-600
When a BL or SR Series is connected: 3 m or less.
1 (modular jack)
Data I/O, control I/O, judgment output
Communication
method
Full-duplex (RS-232C compliant)
Synchronization
method
Asynchronous
Transmission code
ASCII, partly binary
Communication
speed
9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, 115200 bits/s
Data bit length
7/8 bit
Stop bit length

Parity check
Appendix
Head
Communication
standard
SR-600-M-NOA-E
156k to 10 Mbit/s (5 levels)
Data bit length
No. of occupied
stations
PC connection
Data I/O, control I/O

CC-Link
Master unit
Communication
speed
Network
NX-50CL
1 (network connector)
1/2 bit
None/even/odd
A-7
Dimensions
SR-600 Series
(27.8)
2-M3
Depth: 4 mm
(Unit: mm)
24
Center of scanner
13.2
24.3
40
(36.5)
33
18.5
3.5
3.5
3.8
11
9.3
32
Cable length: 1800

Cable length: 200
21
53
Thickness: 13
Cable length: 130
Appendix
SR-600 Series mounting bracket

(Unit: mm)
2-(R2.65)
R18
C1
27.5
18.5
40
R1.5
5.3
5.3
3.5
1.5
32
24.3
0.7
2-R1.5
A-8
0.7
90
1.5
60.8
33
8-(R1.65)
0.7
4-3.3
3.5
SR-600-M-NOA-E
4 Dimensions
N-R2
(Unit: mm)
44.2
41.8
45
4.2
122.3
35.8
28.3
0
R4
(128.5)
N-R4
(Unit: mm)
44.2
41.8
Appendix
4.2
122.3
35.8
0
R4
28.3
45
(128.5)
SR-600-M-NOA-E
57.4
A-9
4 Dimensions
N-UB
(Unit: mm)
44.2
41.8
57
133.8
35.8
40.3
0
R4
4.8
(128.5)
49.9
N-L1
4.8
133.8
35.8
40.3
R4
Appendix
A-10
(Unit: mm)
44.2
41.8
57
(128.5)
49.9
SR-600-M-NOA-E
4 Dimensions
NX-50CL
(Unit: mm)
91.9
78.7
31.6
95
35.4
0
R4
95
(145)
Appendix
SR-600-M-NOA-E
A-11
SR-600 Series Field of View
The size of the field of view for the SR-600 Series is as follows.
SR-600HA
Unit:mm
Reading distance
Field of view Width
size
Height
20
15.9
25
19.2
30
22.6
40
29.2
50
60
35.8
42.5
10.2
12.3
14.4
18.6
22.9
27.1
40
29.2
50
35.8
60
42.5
80
55.7
100
120
69.0
82.3
18.6
22.9
27.1
35.6
44.0
52.5
50
36.7
75
53.6
100
70.6
130
90.9
170
210
118.0
145.0
23.4
34.2
45.0
58.0
75.3
92.6
SR-600
Unit:mm
Reading distance
Field of view Width
size
Height
SR-610
Unit:mm
Reading distance
Field of view Width
size
Height
Appendix
Reading distance
Height
Width
Important
A-12
It is recommended to install the reader such that the code will be positioned in the center of the field of
view.
There are cases where, depending on the conditions of the code, a code is unreadable even though it
fits within the field of view. To verify operation, use the test mode to make sure that codes can be read.
SR-600-M-NOA-E
Troubleshooting
If you suspect that your SR-600 Series device is operating abnormally, check the following.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your nearest KEYENCE sales office.
Unable to read 2D codes and bar codes

Is the illumination LED on?
When using the communication units (NX-50CL, N-R2/R4/UB/L1, or DV-90), make sure that the power supply and
the trigger input are properly connected.
Is [Internal lighting] set to [Disable]? Reset it and try again.
Have the buttons on the reader been activated? The buttons prevent reading when they are being used.
Check the buttons and turn them off.
Is the code setting correct?

Confirm the following settings in the AutoID Navigator.
Recorded code type
Number of digits read
Other settings for each code
Has the device been calibrated for these codes?

It may be necessary to perform a quick calibration after confirming the settings in the AutoID Navigator.
There are 16 different parameter banks that can be registered with quick calibration.
Registering parameters such as the worst print quality or the fastest movement may prevent read errors from
occurring.
When parts of several codes exist the scan range, decoding may take longer.
Set the decode timeout to a longer limit and try reading again.
Appendix
Are the installation distance and angle optimal?

Confirm the distance from the SR-600 Series device to the target code.
The focal distance is 60 mm for the SR-600, 100 mm for the SR-610, and 38 mm for the SR-600HA.
Use the test mode to determine the code read ratio.
Verify the mounting angle so that the SR-600 Series does not experience specular reflection (recommended
range between -15 and +20).
Is the scanner dirty?

Use a soft cloth to clean any water, oil or dust from the scanner.
Is there a problem with the print quality of the 2D code or bar code?
It may be difficult to read codes that have many cracks, chips, specks or blurs.
Codes printed on a dot impact printer or an inkjet printer often have many of the above problems.
Unable to perform quick calibration

Is the laser pointer on?
Turn the laser pointer off and then retry the quick calibration.
Is the device set to read the correct type of code?

Set the type of code to be read in the AutoID Navigator.
Are the quick tuning conditions specified properly?

Confirm that the quick tuning conditions are properly set for the code to be read.
Tuning mode
Inverse/Reverse
Decode range
SR-600-M-NOA-E
A-13
6 Troubleshooting
Unable to send or receive via the AutoID Navigator

Is the model properly registered with the AutoID Navigator?
To send or receive settings via the AutoID Navigator, you need to select a proper device model and update the
connection before sending settings. (Refer to
Chapter 5 AutoID Navigator Functions and Operation)
Has the connection been updated?

The AutoID Navigator requires that the connection be updated before sending settings.
Unable to communicate with the field network via Ethernet

Refer to the relevant page in this manual.
Chapter 8 Field Network Communication
Chapter 9 Ethernet Communication
An error occurs
When the multiple LED indicator shows "E" and "r" repeatedly, perform the following operation to clear the parameter
bank settings.
When the settings are cleared successfully, the multiple LED indicator shows "C".
Operation
Appendix
Hold down and turn on the

power (5 seconds).
A-14
Multiple LED
indicator
Action
Holding down for 5 seconds will clear the parameter bank setting.
("C" is displayed.)
SR-600-M-NOA-E
Checksum Calculation Method
A checksum can be appended to the read data as it is being transmitted.

* No checksum can be appended to commands or responses.
The checksum allows you to check if RS-232C communications have become corrupted. If the checksum does
not match by using the PASS/RTRY or ACK/NAK protocols, build a program that requests it again (RTRY or
NAK ).
* Checksums cannot be appended when using a PLC link.
Checksum calculation range and location

The checksum is calculated using all characters that are not a part of the header or the delimiter and is then
appended immediately before the delimiter as two characters of ASCII code.
Data Format
Header
Read data
Checksum
Delimiter
With appended data

Header
Data size
Code type
Read data
PMI
(Preventative maintenance
information)
Checksum
Delimiter
Appendix
Checksum calculation method

If the read data is "ABC123", the checksum (cc) will be counted.
The characters are converted to ASCII code and converted into two 8-bit binary numbers as shown below.
Each bit of each character is then fed to an Exclusive Or function.
Header
ABC 123
ASCII code
A - 41h B - 42h C - 43h 1 - 31h 2 - 32h 3 - 33h -
Checksum
Delimiter
bit
0100
0100
0100
0011
0011
0011
0001
0010
0011
0001
0010
0011
0111
0000
70h
* Exclusive Or returns 1 if there is an odd number of 1 bits and 0 if there is an even number of 1 bits.
The 2-digit hexadecimal result of this calculation is the checksum.
So cc = 70 (37h 30h)
Example:
Header
ERROR
Header
KEYENCE
SR-600-M-NOA-E
Checksum
Delimiter
100% Checksum
leads to a cc of 58.
Delimiter
leads to a cc of 74.
A-15
7 Checksum Calculation Method
TIP
Exclusive OR calculations
Exclusive Or calculations are carried out as follows for each bit.
0 0=0
0 1=1
1 0=1
1 1=0
*
: Exclusive OR operator
Converting from hexadecimal to binary

Refer to the following chart for converting ASCII code to binary.
Hexadecimal
Binary
0
0000
1
0001
2
0010
3
0011
4
0100
5
0101
6
0110
7
0111
Hexadecimal
Binary
8
1000
9
1001
A
1010
B
1011
C
1100
D
1101
E
1110
F
1111
Appendix
A-16
SR-600-M-NOA-E
ASCII Code List

High-order 4 bits
Hexadecimal
SR-600-M-NOA-E
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
DLE
(SP)
0000
0001
SOH
DC1
0010
STX
DC2
0011
ETX
DC3
0100
EOT
DC4
0101
ENQ
NAK
0110
ACK
SYN
&
0111
BEL
ETB
1000
BS
CAN
1001
HT
EM
1010
LF
SUB
1011
VT
ESC
1100
CL
FS
<
1101
CR
GS
1110
SO
RS
>
1111
SI
US
del
Appendix
Low order 4 bits
Binary
A-17
Configuration Record List
It may be useful to record your specified parameter settings. Please make copies of these pages for your reference.
Operation setting
Read mode
Appended data function
Single
Data-send timing
After reading
Continuous
Repeat read prevention

interval
) *100 ms
Bank collection
Laser-aim pulse duration
) *100 ms
Burst read
Burst count
) times
Burst interval
) ms
Code type
Brightness
At trigger end
Symbol ID
Position level
Code vertex coordinates
L1 (
Burst No.
Code center coordinates
L2 (
Read count
Unused ECC
L3 (
Reading time
Preventative maintenance
information (PMI)
L4 (
Reading Error Codes
Alternate order
Registry order
PMI preset value
Begin with successful bank

)
Trigger setting
Trigger type
Level trigger
One-shot trigger
Trigger on command
Trigger off command
) ms
Appendix
A-18
) bps
Baud rate
Data length
7 bits
8 bits
Parity
NONE
Even
Stop bit
1 bits
2 bits
Multi-drop link
Disable
Enable
RTC/CTS handshaking
Disable
Enable
Handshaking
No Handshaking
PASS/RTRY
Data size
Disable
Enable
Checksum
Disable
Enable
Header
NONE
STX
ESC
Setting (
Terminator
CR
ETX
CR+LF
Setting (
Delimiter character
Inter delimiter
Composite delimiter
Total size after filling
Filling character
Odd
ID number ()
ACK/NAK
SR-600-M-NOA-E
9 Configuration Record List
Terminal settings
IN1 terminal function
IN terminal common setting
Terminal function
Trigger input Preset registration Start test mode

Start tuning Disable
Test mode
Reading rate
check
Tact
measurement
IN LED
Synchronize
Do not
synchronize
Power-ON trigger
Activate
Do not activate
Terminal function
Trigger input Preset registration Start test mode

Start tuning Disable
Test mode
Reading rate
check
Tact
measurement
IN LED
Synchronize
Do not
synchronize
Power-ON trigger
Activate
Do not activate
Input polarity
Normal open
point
Normal close
point
1 ms
2 ms
Input pulse width

OUT1 terminal setting
OUT terminal common
setting
Barcode position
10 ms
OK
NG
ERROR
PRESET
TRG BUSY
USB BUSY
MODE BUSY
ERR BUSY
OK
NG
ERROR
PRESET
TRG BUSY
USB BUSY
MODE BUSY
ERR BUSY
OK
NG
ERROR
PRESET
TRG BUSY
USB BUSY
MODE BUSY
ERR BUSY
OK
NG
ERROR
PRESET
TUNING
TRG BUSY
USB BUSY
MODE BUSY
ERR BUSY
EXT.LIGHT
Output ON duration
BUSY output upon

power-up
Disable
Normal open point
Normal close point
TUNING
TUNING
TUNING
*100 ms
Enable
Appendix
EXT.LIGHT output polarity
Barcode position
Code setting
Setting option
Code setting 1
Code setting 2
Code setting 3
Code setting 4
Code type
Maximum number of digits
Minimum number of digits
QR
Read Micro QR
Structured append mode
DataMatrix
Read rectangular DataMatrix
PDF417
Read Micro PDF417
GS1 Databar
Read GS1 Databar Truncated
Read GS1 Databar Stacked

Omnidirectional
Read GS1 Databar Limited
Read GS1 Databar Expanded
Read GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked
CODE39, ITF, NW-7

common
Inspect check-digit
Send check-digit
CODE39
Send start/stop characters
Read Trioptic CODE39
CODE128
Do not send
Lowercase
Uppercase
Do not send
Lowercase
Uppercase
Do not send
Lowercase
Uppercase
Check-digit type
GS1-128 readings
Read setting
EAN/JAN13
EAN/JAN8
UPC
EAN/JAN13
EAN/JAN8
UPC
EAN/JAN13
EAN/JAN8
UPC
EAN/JAN13
EAN/JAN8
UPC
Number of output digits of UPC-A
13 digits
12 digits
13 digits
12 digits
13 digits
12 digits
13 digits
12 digits
JAN/EAN/UPC
SR-600-M-NOA-E
Do not send
Lowercase
Uppercase
NW-7(Codabar)
Add '0' to UPC-E system character
Support 2-digit Supplemental
Only read composite code
GTIN compatible 14-digit output
A-19
Composite character
(CC-A/C-B/CC-C
Maximum number of digits (2D code)
Minimum number of digits (2D code)
Allow short margin

Multi-Reading
Number of Multi-Readings
Less than the specified number of

readings
Limiting the digits
output
Output limit setting
Disable
Forward
Reverse
Disable
Forward
Reverse
Disable
Forward
Reverse
Disable
Forward
Reverse
Number of effective digits
Number of start digits
Setting option
Code setting 5
Code setting 6
Code setting 7
Code setting 8
Code type
Maximum number of digits
Minimum number of digits
QR
Read Micro QR
Appendix
Structured append mode
DataMatrix
Read rectangular DataMatrix
PDF417
Read Micro PDF417
GS1 Databar
Read GS1 Databar Truncated
Read GS1 Databar Stacked

Omnidirectional
Read GS1 Databar Limited
Read GS1 Databar Expanded
Read GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked
CODE39, ITF, NW-7

common
Inspect check-digit
Send check-digit
CODE39
Send start/stop characters
Read Trioptic Code39
CODE128
Do not send
Lowercase
Uppercase
Do not send
Lowercase
Uppercase
Do not send
Lowercase
Uppercase
Check-digit type
JAN13
JAN8
UPC-E
JAN13
JAN8
UPC-E
JAN13
JAN8
UPC-E
JAN13
JAN8
UPC-E
Number of output digits of UPC-A
13 digits
12 digits
13 digits
12 digits
13 digits
12 digits
13 digits
12 digits
Add '0' to UPC-E system character
Only read composite code
GTIN compatible 14-digit output
Maximum number of digits (2D code)
Minimum number of digits (2D code)
Number of Multi-Readings
Less than the specified number of

readings
Limiting the digits
output
Read setting
Allow short margin

Multi-Reading
GS1-128 readings
JAN/EAN/UPC
Composite character
(CC-A/C-B/CC-C)
Do not send
Lowercase
Uppercase
NW-7(Codabar)
A-20
)
)
Output limit setting
Disable
Forward
Reverse
Disable
Forward
Reverse
Disable
Forward
Reverse
Disable
Forward
Reverse
Number of effective digits
Number of start digits
SR-600-M-NOA-E
Read setting
Setting option
Parameter bank number 1 Parameter bank number 2 Parameter bank number 3 Parameter bank number 4
Alternate setting
Code setting
) (
) (
) (
Exposure time
) (
) (
) (
Capture delay time
) (
) (
) (
Sensitivity
) (
) (
) (
Gain
) (
) (
) (
Reverse read
Inverse
Reverse
Decode timeout
) (
) (
) (
Internal bank retry count
) (
) (
) (
Brightness
) (
) (
) (
Dynamic range
) (
) (
) (
Offset
) (
) (
) (
Decode range
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
Y-axis
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
Digital filter
Light setting
QR
Normal mode
Quality mode
Algorithm
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
) (
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
) (
External lighting
Algorithm
) (
Internal lighting
Allow clumsy cell
DataMatrix
X-axis
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Allow low contrast
Allow low contrast

Setting option
Parameter bank number 5 Parameter bank number 6 Parameter bank number 7 Parameter bank number 8
Alternate setting
Code setting
) (
) (
) (
Exposure time
) (
) (
) (
Capture delay time
) (
) (
) (
Sensitivity
) (
) (
) (
Gain
) (
) (
) (
Reverse read
Inverse
Reverse
Decode timeout
) (
) (
) (
) (
) (
) (
Brightness
) (
) (
) (
Dynamic range
) (
) (
) (
Offset
) (
) (
) (
Decode range
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
Y-axis
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
Digital filter
Light setting
QR
Internal lighting
External lighting
Algorithm
Allow clumsy cell
Algorithm
DataMatrix
) (
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
) (
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
) (
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Allow clumsy cell
Allow low contrast
Allow low contrast
SR-600-M-NOA-E
X-axis
A-21
Appendix
Allow clumsy cell
Setting option
Parameter bank number 9
Alternate setting
Code setting
) (
) (
) (
Exposure time
) (
) (
) (
Capture delay time
) (
) (
) (
Sensitivity
) (
) (
) (
Gain
) (
) (
) (
Reverse read
Inverse
Reverse
Decode timeout
) (
) (
) (
) (
) (
) (
Brightness
) (
) (
) (
Dynamic range
) (
) (
) (
Offset
) (
) (
) (
Decode range
Light setting
QR
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
Y-axis
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
Algorithm
) (
External lighting
Algorithm
) (
Internal lighting
Normal mode
Quality mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
) (
Normal mode
Quality mode
Allow clumsy cell
DataMatrix
X-axis
Digital filter
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Allow clumsy cell
Allow low contrast
Allow low contrast
Appendix
Setting option
Alternate setting
Code setting
) (
) (
) (
Exposure time
) (
) (
) (
Capture delay time
) (
) (
) (
Sensitivity
) (
) (
) (
Gain
) (
) (
) (
Reverse read
Inverse
Reverse
Decode timeout duration
) (
) (
) (
) (
) (
) (
Brightness
) (
) (
) (
Dynamic range
) (
) (
) (
Offset
) (
) (
) (
Decode range
Light setting
QR
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
Y-axis
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
) (
) to (
(
Internal lighting
External lighting
Algorithm
Allow clumsy cell
Algorithm
DataMatrix
X-axis
Digital filter
) (
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
) (
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
) (
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Speed Mode
Normal mode
Quality mode
Allow clumsy cell
Allow low contrast
Allow low contrast
A-22
SR-600-M-NOA-E
Tuning conditions setting

Normal mode
Moving mode
Dot print mode
Tuning mode
Exposure time
Reverse read
Inverse
Disable
Enable
Auto
Reverse
Disable
Enable
100 ms
200 ms
No limit
Specified value
Decode timeout setting
Offset
Decode range
Digital filter setting
Expansion process
Contraction process
Both
Specified value
(
)
Light setting
Internal light
External light
Verification method
Constant
Start digit
digits
Increment
Preset data
Other settings
Verification/Preset setting
Auto increment
Data output in test mode
TUNE button laser setting
General activation
Activate only in test mode
Activate only in operating mode
Do not activate
Display the read time parameter bank number
Do not save
Image save location

Burst No. to be saved
Append data size length
SR-600-M-NOA-E
Appendix
TUNE button lock
RAM
3
ROM
5
A-23
10 Factory Default Setting List

The factory default settings are as follows.
Operation setting
Single label read mode
Read mode
At reading end
Data-send timing
Appended data function
Disable
Reading Error Codes
ERROR
Begin with successful bank
Alternate order
Code setting
Code setting 1 Code setting 2 Code setting 3 Code setting 4 Code setting 5 Code setting 6 Code setting 7 Code setting 8
QR
DataMatrix
PDF417
GS1 Databar
CODE39
CODE128
NW-7
JAN/EAN
7089
3116
2710
74
50
128
50
Read Micro QR
Structured
append mode
Read
rectangular
DataMatrix
Read Micro
PDF417
Read GS1
Databar
All
Reading
Check digit
inspection
Start/
Stop character
setting
Start/
Stop character
type
Lowercase
Read Trioptic
CODE39
Read GS1-128
Code type
Minimum
number of digits
Number
of digits
Maximum
read
number of digits
Detail
setting
Appendix
A-24
JAN readings
JAN13
JAN8
UPC-E
Number of
output digits of
UPC-A
13
Add "0" to UPCE system code
Support 2-digit
Supplemental
Support 5-digit
Supplemental
Add-on limit
Reading
support GTIN
14-digit output
Allow short
margin
Multi-Read setting
Output length limit
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
SR-600-M-NOA-E
Read setting
Common to all banks
Alternate setting
Code setting
10 *30 s
Exposure time
0 ms
Capture delay time
10000 *0.001x
Sensitivity
10000 *0.001x
Gain
Reverse read
Inverse
Reverse
0 times
Repeat read attempts
Brightness
Hi-Sensitive
Dynamic range
X-axis
000 to 751
Y-axis
000 to 479
Disable
Digital filter
Light setting
Disable
10 *10 ms
Decode timeout duration
Decode range
Disable
Internal light
Enable
External light
Disable
Tuning settings
Normal Mode
Tuning mode
Reverse read
Inverse
Automatic
Reverse
Disable
Decode range
X-axis
000 to 751
Y-axis
000 to 479
Disable
Digital filter setting

Light setting
Appendix
No limit
Decode timeout
Internal light
Enable
External light
Disable
Trigger setting
Trigger type
Level trigger
Trigger on command
LON
Trigger off command
LOFF
SR-600-M-NOA-E
A-25
115200 bps
Baud rate
Data length
8 bit
Parity
Even
1 bit
Stop bit
Disable
Multi-drop link
Disable
RTC/CTS handshaking
No Handshaking
Handshaking
Data size
Disable
Checksum
Disable
Header
Disable
Delimiter
CR
Delimiter character
":"
","
Inter delimiter
Disable
Composite delimiter
Total size after filling
Filling character
""
Terminal settings
Terminal function
Trigger input
IN LED
Synchronize
Power-ON trigger
Disable
Terminal function
IN LED
Do not synchronize
Appendix
Power-ON trigger
IN terminal common
Input polarity
setting
Input pulse width
Disable
Normal open point
1 ms
OK
NG/ERROR
ERROR
TRG BUSY/USB BUSY/MODE BUSY/

ERR BUSY
OUT terminal common

setting
Output ON duration
BUSY output upon
power-up
500 ms
Enable
Other settings
Verification method
Verification/Preset
setting
Start digit
digits
Preset data
TUNE button lock
1
8
Disable
Disable
Data output in test mode
Output
TUNE button laser setting
Allow by operation
Display the read time parameter bank number

Image save location
Append data size length
A-26
Constant
Enable
RAM
Disable
SR-600-M-NOA-E
11 Index
A
Alternate Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Data transmission timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
ASCII code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Decoding range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
At reading end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Dedicated communication unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
At trigger end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Details of Appended Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
AutoID Navigator, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Digital filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
AutoID Navigator, Screen layout of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Automatic increment verification function . . . . . . . 3-10
Direct Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
B
Bank collection reading mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Bank prioritizing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Exposure time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Burst reading mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
External light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 5-11
Burst reading test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
F
C
Factory default setting list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24

FCC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Camera: Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
FDA (CDRH) Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Camera: Bank test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Field network controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Camera: Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Function and operation of the input terminals
Canada IC (Industry Canada) Regulations . . . . . . . . . 3

CC-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
CE Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
(IN1 and IN2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Function and operation of the output terminals
(OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4) . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Checksum calculation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15

Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11, 5-19
Code detail setting: CODE128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Code detail setting: CODE39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Code detail setting: DataMatrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
General Specifications: SR-600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Code detail setting: GS1 DataBar (RSS) . . . . . . . . 5-25

Code detail setting: ITF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Code detail setting: JAN/EAN/UPC . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Code detail setting: NW-7(Codabar) . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Hi-DR (High dynamic range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Code detail setting: PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Hi-Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Code detail setting: QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Hi-SNR (High S/N ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Command Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Communication Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Composite characters (CC-A, CC-B, CC-C) . . . . . 4-11
I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Conjugated QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Image Saving Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Connecting the SR-600 Series to a PC . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Installation Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Continuous Reading Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Installing the dedicated communication unit . . . . . . .6-6

Installing the USB driver (N-UB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Installing the USB driver (SR-600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Internal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 5-11
SR-600-M-NOA-E
A-27
Appendix
Camera setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Quick Setup Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
L
Level trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Live View and Load Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Quick Setup Code: AutoID Navigator . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
R
Read data communication format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Reading Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10

Reading multiple codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Reading range characteristics (Typical) . . . . . . . . . A-3
Multi Read setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Reading rate test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Multi-I/O Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
ROI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Multiple LED indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
S
N
Saving into RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Appendix
Negative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Saving into ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
N-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Saving/reading a setting file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
N-R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Sending/receiving settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
N-R2/R4/UB/L1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
N-R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Serial Communication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
N-UB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Setting command list: N-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
NX-50CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Setting commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
NX-50CL specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Setting item: Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Setting Record List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Setting the N-L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Shutter Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Obtaining data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Single Reading Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
SR-600 Series Field of View Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
ON at power-on setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Synchronization with IN LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
One-shot trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
OP-80616 wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
T
Terminal and Test mode: AutoID Navigator . . . . . .5-41
TEST button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Parameter bank setting information . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trigger Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
PC environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Pin layout and connection of SR-600 Series
TUNE button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Tuning policy setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Position test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Preset/Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Preventive Maintenance Information (PMI) . . . . . . 3-22
Processing time test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Q
Quick Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
A-28
U
UL certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
W
Wiring a field network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
SR-600-M-NOA-E
Wiring an RS-232C port device (N-R2) . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Wiring an RS-422A/485 port device (N-R4) . . . . . . 2-13
Wiring the CC-Link controller (NX-50CL) . . . . . . . . 2-29
Wiring the Dedicated Communication Unit . . . . . . . 2-7
Appendix
SR-600-M-NOA-E
A-29
Revision History
Date of printing
Version
November 2010
Official release
November 2013
2nd revision 2nd

edition
December 2013
3rd revision 1st

edition
Revision contents
Windows 8 has been added to the target operating systems.

Errors have been corrected.
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1)
year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were
used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products
would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to
KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon
examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace
at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from
any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair,
unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat,
coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it
is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in
humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications
state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE
assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from
any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS,
LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR
TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS
ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST
BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not
apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide
such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written
information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2013 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 193039E 1123-1 373GB Printed in Japan

SR-600 Um 373GB GB WW 1123-1 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SR-600 Um 373GB GB WW 1123-1 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

373GB

Fixed Mount 2D Code

Class 1 laser product

Safety Precautions for International

FDA (CDRH) Regulations

Applicable standards (EMS)

Applicable standards (LVD)

EN60825-1, Class 1 Laser Product

Canada IC (Industry Canada) Regulations

Dedicated Communication Unit N-R2/R4/UB/L1

Canada IC (Industry Canada) Regulations

Applicable standards (EMS)

Software License Agreement

Safety Precautions for International Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Package Contents and Product Lineup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

System Configuration and Setup Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Chapter 2 Connection and Wiring

Connecting the SR-600 Series to the Dedicated Communication Unit. . . . . . . . . . .2-2

Connecting the SR-600 Series to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Wiring the Dedicated Communication Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Installing the USB Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Connecting the Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Connection when not using a Communication Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

Chapter 3 SR-600 Series Functions

Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

Quick Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

Alternate Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Preset/Verification Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

Multi-I/O Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Quick Setup Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Preventive Maintenance Information (PMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Image Saving Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Quick Setup Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Image Saving Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Chapter 4 Operation of the SR-600 Series

Reading Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Reading Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10

Chapter 5 AutoID Navigator Functions and Operation

Installing, Starting, and Shutting Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

Screen Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6

Using AutoID Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Sending/Receiving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Saving/Reading a Setting File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Quick Setup Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Terminal and Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Live View and Load Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

Chapter 6 Mounting the SR-600 Series

Mounting the SR-600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Installing the Dedicated Communication Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6

Installing the NX-50CL Network Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Data Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Command Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Chapter 8 Field Network Communication

CC-Link Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2

SR-600 Series Device Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Chapter 9 Ethernet Communication